Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
AL-KASHIF<br />
SWAHILI - JUZUU YA KUMI NA SABA
Haki <strong>ya</strong> ku<strong>na</strong>kili imehifadhiwa <strong>na</strong>:<br />
AL-ITRAH FOUNDATION<br />
ISBN: 9987 - 427 - 43 - X<br />
Kimeandikwa <strong>na</strong>:<br />
Sheikh Muhammad Jawad Mughniy<strong>ya</strong><br />
Kimetafsiriwa <strong>na</strong>:<br />
Sheikh Hassan. A. Mwalupa<br />
P.O. Box 19701, Dar es Salaam/Tanzania.<br />
Email:mwalupa@hotmail.com<br />
Kimehaririwa <strong>na</strong>:<br />
Ustadh Abdallah Mohamed<br />
Kupangwa katika Kompyuta <strong>na</strong>:<br />
Ukhti Pili Rajab<br />
Toleo la kwanza: Juni, 2007<br />
Nakala:5000<br />
Kimetolewa <strong>na</strong> kuchapishwa <strong>na</strong>:<br />
<strong>Al</strong>itrah Foundation<br />
P.O. Box 19701 Dar es Salaam, Tanzania<br />
Simu:+255 22 2110640<br />
Fax: +255 22 2131036<br />
Email: info@alitrah.org<br />
Website: www.alitrah.org
YALIYOMO<br />
<strong>Al</strong> -Kahf { Sura 21 }<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 1 - 3: Imewakurubia watu hisabu <strong>ya</strong>o.......................... ............3<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 7-15: Waulizeni wenye kumbukumbu......................................7<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 16-23: Je, vitendo v<strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu Mtukufu vi<strong>na</strong> malen<br />
go.....................................................................................12<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 24-29: Leteni dalili zenu.............................................................17<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 30-36: Maji ni Uhai.....................................................................21<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 37-44: Mtu ameumbwa <strong>na</strong> haraka............................................. 27<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 45-50: Nawaon<strong>ya</strong> kwa wahyi..................................................... 32<br />
Mizani siku <strong>ya</strong> ki<strong>ya</strong>ma.................................................... 33<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 51-60: Ibrahim............................................................................38<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 61-70: Wakasema:Mleteni..........................................................43<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 71-77: Tukamwokoa yeye <strong>na</strong> Lut...............................................48
A<strong>ya</strong> 78-82: Daud <strong>na</strong> Suleiman...........................................................50<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 83 - 91: Na Ayyuba alipomlingania Mola Wake.............57<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 92 - 100: Hakika Umma wenu huu ni Umma moja, <strong>na</strong> mimi<br />
ni Mola wenu kwa hio niabuduni.......................62<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 101 - 107: Ardhi watarithi waja wangu walio wema..........68<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 108 - 112: Hakika mungu wenu ni mmoja tu......................73<br />
HAJJ { Sura 22 }<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 1-7: Ufufuo............................................................... 77<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 8 - 14: Sababu <strong>ya</strong> maarifa katika A<strong>ya</strong> moja.................. 85<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 15 - 18: Ajinyonge......................................................... 91<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 19 - 25: Mahasimu wawili...............................................96<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 26 - 29: Itwaharishe nyumba <strong>ya</strong>ngu.................................99<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 30 - 35: Miiko <strong>ya</strong> Mungu <strong>na</strong> nembo zake......................104<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 36 - 37: Ngamia wanono.............................................. 108
A<strong>ya</strong> 38 - 41: Mwenyezi Mungu huwakinga walioamini.......112<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 42 - 51: Wakikukadhibisha.......................................... 120<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 52 - 57: Kusoma kwa Mtume <strong>na</strong> kujiingiza shetani..... 125<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 58 - 64: Waliohajiri........................................................130<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 65 - 70: A<strong>na</strong>zuia mbingu...............................................135<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 71 - 76: Wa<strong>na</strong>abudu asiyekuwa mungu.........................139<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 77 - 78: Fanyeni Kheri ili mfaulu..................................145
Kwa ji<strong>na</strong> la Mwenyezi Mungu,<br />
Mwingi wa Rehema, Mwenye kurehemu<br />
UTANGULIZI WA MCHAPISHAJI<br />
Kitabu hiki kilichoko mikononi mwako hivi sasa ni juhudi <strong>ya</strong> miaka mingi<br />
sa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> watu waliojitolea kuo<strong>na</strong> kazi hii imefanikiwa bila <strong>ya</strong> kumsahau<br />
Marhum Abu Muhammad wa London.<br />
Kama lilivyo ji<strong>na</strong> la Tafsiri ndivyo ilivyo Tafsiri yenyewe ambayo<br />
mwa<strong>na</strong>chuoni huyu mahiri kabisa aliyeifafanua ni mtu aliyebobea katika<br />
fani zote ambazo mfasiri (Mfafanuzi) a<strong>na</strong>takiwa awe <strong>na</strong>zo.<br />
Sheikh Muhammad Jawad Mughniy<strong>ya</strong> ameonesha cheche zake katika<br />
vitabu vingi alivyoviandika katika maudhui mbalimbali <strong>na</strong> hivyo kujipatia<br />
wasomaji wengi sa<strong>na</strong>.<br />
Msomi huyu, mwenye fikra huru <strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>yetetea kile a<strong>na</strong>chokiamini, ni mtu<br />
mwenye mawazo mapa<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> ku<strong>ya</strong>angalia mambo kwa undani sa<strong>na</strong>,<br />
kipaumbele chake ni katika maslahi <strong>ya</strong> umma huu <strong>na</strong> amejaribu sa<strong>na</strong> kwenda<br />
<strong>na</strong> wakati.<br />
Sifa kubwa pekee <strong>ya</strong> mwa<strong>na</strong>chuoni huyu ni kuwa yeye hakujihusisha sa<strong>na</strong><br />
<strong>na</strong> kung'ang'ania madhehebu fulani tu, labda hii <strong>ya</strong>toka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> wadhifa wake<br />
wa ukadhi aliokuwa <strong>na</strong>o katika nchi <strong>ya</strong> Lebanon ambayo i<strong>na</strong> madhehebu<br />
mengi, ambapo sula la madhehebu ni nyeti nchini humo, hata hivyo yeye<br />
aliweza kuamua matatizo <strong>ya</strong> watu kwenye ofisi <strong>ya</strong>ke kulinga<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> madhe-
hebu <strong>ya</strong>o pale walipomwendea. Hiyo ilimsaidia sa<strong>na</strong> hata kuweza kutoa<br />
kitabu kitwacho <strong>Al</strong>-Fiqh a'laa madhaahabil-khamsah (Fikhi <strong>ya</strong> madhehebu<br />
matano) <strong>ya</strong>ani <strong>ya</strong> Ha<strong>na</strong>fi, Maaliki, Shafi, Hambali <strong>na</strong> Shia (ambacho<br />
twataraji kitatoka kwa lugha <strong>ya</strong> kiswahili hivi karibuni Inshaallah).<br />
Jambo lililotupa msukumo wa kukifasiri kitabu hiki kwa lugha <strong>ya</strong><br />
Kiswahili ni zile faida nyingi atakazozipata msomaji <strong>na</strong> kujua mambo<br />
mengi <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> ajabu <strong>ya</strong>liyo map<strong>ya</strong> kwake ambayo si rahisi ku<strong>ya</strong>pata kwa<br />
wafasiri wengine.<br />
Msomaji atapata faida katika fani za Sa<strong>ya</strong>nsi, Siasa, Historia, Mashairi,<br />
visa vizuri, <strong>na</strong> Saikolojia miongoni mwa mengine; ndiyo maa<strong>na</strong> msomaji<br />
atashangaa kidogo a<strong>na</strong>poisoma Tafsiri hii atakapoo<strong>na</strong> mwandishi amewataja<br />
<strong>na</strong> kuwanukuu watu kama ki<strong>na</strong> Mfalme Edward, wa<strong>na</strong>sa<strong>ya</strong>nsi kama<br />
ki<strong>na</strong> Enstein, wasanii kama Charlie Champlin (Mchekeshaji maarufu), <strong>na</strong><br />
wengineo, hali i<strong>na</strong>yoifan<strong>ya</strong> tafsiri hii kuwa ni <strong>ya</strong> kipekee kabisa.<br />
Mtindo alioutumia mwandishi ni sahali uliokusudiwa watu wa tabaka<br />
mbalimbali, wa<strong>na</strong>vyuoni <strong>na</strong> watu wa kawaida.<br />
Nia yetu ni kukigawan<strong>ya</strong> kitabu hiki bure lakini tumelazimika kukiuza kwa<br />
bei <strong>na</strong>fuu ili kurudisha gharama za uchapishaji.<br />
Mwisho: Shukrani kubwa iwaendee bila <strong>ya</strong> kuwataja watu waliojitolea<br />
usiku <strong>na</strong> mcha<strong>na</strong>, jopo la wafasiri, wahariri, wachapaji, waliotupa moyo <strong>na</strong><br />
kutoa maoni <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong> walioisimamia ili kuhakikisha kwamba kitabu kimemfikia<br />
msomaji.<br />
i
Makosa <strong>ya</strong> Chapa.<br />
Sikumbuki kama nimewahi kusoma kitabu kilichotoka kupigwa chapa, cha<br />
zamani au cha sasa, bila <strong>ya</strong> kukuta makosa <strong>ya</strong> chapa. Nafikiri sitasoma<br />
kitabu kisichokuwa hivyo. Nimejaribu sa<strong>na</strong> kuliepuka hilo katika tungo<br />
zangu, lakini sikufanikiwa.<br />
Nilikuwa sifikirii kama ni<strong>na</strong>weza kuo<strong>na</strong> makosa ha<strong>ya</strong> katika maandishi <strong>ya</strong><br />
msahafu mtukufu, kama <strong>ya</strong>le <strong>ya</strong>liyo katika baadhi <strong>ya</strong> chapa; kwa mfano<br />
neno <strong>ya</strong>bswutu kwa swad, badala <strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong>bsutu kwa sin, <strong>na</strong> katika chapa <strong>ya</strong><br />
Tafsir Arrazi <strong>ya</strong> Misr <strong>ya</strong> mwaka 1935, Sura <strong>ya</strong> (2:146). Imeandikwa La<br />
Ya'alamuun, (hawajui) badala <strong>ya</strong> Ya'alamuun (wa<strong>na</strong>jua). Mfano wa makosa<br />
ha<strong>ya</strong> hausameheki.<br />
Katika Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Ma<strong>na</strong>r, chapa <strong>ya</strong> Pili, sura (5:212), imeandikwa<br />
Fawqahum ila <strong>ya</strong>wmil qi<strong>ya</strong>ma badala <strong>ya</strong> Fawqahum <strong>ya</strong>wamal qi<strong>ya</strong>ma.<br />
Hatuwezi kusema kosa hili ni kubwa zaidi kuliko lile.<br />
Lakini mkosaji atatuletea udhuru kwa msemo mashuhuri huko kwetu Jabal<br />
amil 'Makosa <strong>ya</strong> chapa.'<br />
Katika Tafsiri Majmau chapa <strong>ya</strong> Urfan, Sura (46:15), imeandikwa: Hatta<br />
idha balagha arbai' <strong>na</strong> sa<strong>na</strong>h badala <strong>ya</strong>: Hattaidha balagha ashuddahu<br />
arbai ' <strong>na</strong> sa<strong>na</strong>h"<br />
Kusema hivi sio kama ni<strong>na</strong>jitetea kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> makosa <strong>ya</strong> chapa atakayo<strong>ya</strong>kuta<br />
msomaji katika kitabu hiki, ijapokuwa <strong>na</strong>omba msamaha kama litatokea<br />
hili, lakini makusudio <strong>ya</strong>ngu hasa ni kumwambia yule atakayefungua<br />
macho <strong>ya</strong>ke kwenye makosa <strong>ya</strong> matamko <strong>na</strong> kuufungia macho uzuri wa<br />
maa<strong>na</strong>. Vilevile ni<strong>na</strong>mwambia yule ambaye siku moja aliniambia: "Vitabu<br />
v<strong>ya</strong>ko vimejaa makosa <strong>ya</strong> chapa.” Kama kwamba haku<strong>na</strong> kitu chochote<br />
ii
katika vitabu hivyo isipokuwa makosa <strong>ya</strong> chapa tu. Wote hao ni<strong>na</strong>waambia:<br />
Mungu awasamehe <strong>na</strong> aniongoze mimi <strong>na</strong> nyinyi.<br />
Vyovyote iwavyo, mimi ni<strong>na</strong>omba msamaha kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> makosa <strong>ya</strong><br />
kifikra <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> chapa. A<strong>na</strong>sema Amirul Muminiin (a.s): "Watu wote ni<br />
wapungufu wenye kuchanganyikiwa, isipokuwa yule aliyehifadhiwa <strong>na</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu." Na Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t) ndiye mwenye jukumu<br />
la kunikubalia <strong>ya</strong>le niliyo<strong>ya</strong>patia <strong>na</strong> kunisamehe nili<strong>ya</strong>kosea, kwa jaha <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mtume <strong>na</strong> kizazi chake, ziwashukie rehema <strong>na</strong> amani (Amin).<br />
MUHAMMAD JAWAD MUGHNIYYAH<br />
iii
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Kwa ji<strong>na</strong> la Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
Mwingi wa rehema Mwenye kurehemu<br />
1. Imewakurubia watu hisabu<br />
<strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong>o wamo katika<br />
mughafala wa<strong>na</strong>puuza.<br />
2. Hawafikii dhikr mp<strong>ya</strong> kutoka<br />
kwa Mola wao ila huisikiliza<br />
<strong>na</strong> huku wa<strong>na</strong>ifanyia mchezo.<br />
3. Zimeghafilika nyoyo zao Na<br />
<strong>Juzuu</strong> <strong>ya</strong> 17. Imeshuka Makka<br />
I<strong>na</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> 112<br />
wale waliodhulumu hunog’o<strong>na</strong><br />
kwa siri: Ni <strong>na</strong>ni huyu<br />
isipokuwa ni mtu tu kama<br />
nyinyi. M<strong>na</strong>uendea uchawi<br />
hali <strong>na</strong>nyi m<strong>na</strong>o<strong>na</strong>?<br />
2
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
4. <strong>Al</strong>isema: Mola wangu a<strong>na</strong>jua<br />
<strong>ya</strong>semwayo mbinguni <strong>na</strong> ardhini<br />
<strong>na</strong> Yeye ni mwenye<br />
kusikia, mwenye kujua.<br />
5. Laki<strong>na</strong> walisema: Hizo ni<br />
ndoto za ovyo ovyo, bali amezizua,<br />
bali huyo ni mshairi. Basi<br />
atuletee ishara kama walivyotumwa<br />
wale wa mwanzo.<br />
6. Hawakuamini kabla <strong>ya</strong>o watu<br />
wa mji tuliouangamiza. Je,<br />
wataamini hao.<br />
IMEWAKURUBIA WATU HISABU YAO<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 1 – 6<br />
MAANA<br />
Imewakurubia watu hisabu <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong>o wamo katika mughafala wa<strong>na</strong>puuza.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> hisabu hapa ni siku <strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma, <strong>na</strong>yo iko karibu <strong>na</strong> kila mtu,<br />
kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu itakuja tu, hata kama muda utakuwa mrefu. Maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>fupishwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong> Imam <strong>Al</strong>i: “Usijisahau kwani wewe hujasahauliwa.”<br />
Na akasema te<strong>na</strong>: “Usighafilke kwani wewe hujasahauliwa.” Akasema<br />
te<strong>na</strong>: “Hatua fupi ilioje <strong>ya</strong> mtu aliye <strong>na</strong> siku moja tu ambayo hawezi<br />
kuizidisha, <strong>na</strong> mauti <strong>ya</strong>liyo <strong>na</strong> haraka <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>muandama mpaka aitoke”<br />
3
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Hawafikii dhikr mp<strong>ya</strong> kutoka kwa Mola wao ila huisikiliza <strong>na</strong> huku<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>ifanyia mchezo.<br />
Wa<strong>na</strong>ikabili haki kwa kuikadhibisha, <strong>na</strong>saha za kejeli <strong>na</strong> hadhari za dharau.<br />
Zimeghafilika nyoyo zao <strong>na</strong> haki, hawajali kitu wala hawahisi majukumu<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kuulizwa hisabu <strong>na</strong> malipo; sawa <strong>na</strong> wan<strong>ya</strong>ma <strong>na</strong> wadudu.<br />
Na wale waliodhulumu hunog’o<strong>na</strong> kwa siri: Ni <strong>na</strong>ni huyu isipokuwa ni<br />
mtu tu kama nyinyi.<br />
Washiriki<strong>na</strong> walinong’oneza<strong>na</strong> kuhusu aliyesilimu <strong>na</strong> kuongoka, kuwa<br />
huyo Muhammad, ni <strong>na</strong>ni hata tumtii <strong>na</strong> kumfuata? Yeye si mtu tu kama<br />
watu wengine, a<strong>na</strong>kula chakula <strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>tembea sokoni? Ama elimu <strong>na</strong> fadhila<br />
basi ni maneno bila maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> miujiza ni uchawi <strong>na</strong> kuvunga.<br />
M<strong>na</strong>uendea uchawi hali <strong>na</strong>nyi m<strong>na</strong>o<strong>na</strong>?<br />
M<strong>na</strong>uendea hapa, i<strong>na</strong> maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kukubali, <strong>na</strong> m<strong>na</strong>o<strong>na</strong> ni kwa maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong><br />
m<strong>na</strong>jua. Si ajabu wao kuzikadhibisha A<strong>ya</strong> za Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> dalili<br />
zake ambazo amekuja <strong>na</strong>zo Mtume mtukufu (s.a.w.). Kila mwenye kiburi<br />
hutafuta visingizio v<strong>ya</strong> ai<strong>na</strong> hii ikiwa ha<strong>na</strong> hoja.<br />
<strong>Al</strong>isema: Mola wangu a<strong>na</strong>jua <strong>ya</strong>semwayo mbinguni <strong>na</strong> ardhini <strong>na</strong><br />
Yeye ni mwenye kusikia, mwenye kujua.<br />
Walimwambia Mtume (s.a.w.) kuwa yeye ni mchawi akawajibu kuwa<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong>jua ukweli wake <strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>jua kauli <strong>ya</strong>o hii, kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu<br />
hakifichiki kwake kitu chochote katika ardhi <strong>na</strong> katika mbingu.<br />
Atawahisabu <strong>na</strong> atawalipa vile m<strong>na</strong>vyostahiki.<br />
Haku<strong>na</strong> jawabu kwa a<strong>na</strong>yeipinga haki isipokuwa kupelekwa kwenye<br />
mahakama <strong>ya</strong> uadilifu.<br />
4
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Laki<strong>na</strong> walisema: Hizo ni ndoto za ovyo ovyo, bali amezizua, bali huyo<br />
ni mshairi.<br />
Waliikataa wa<strong>na</strong>mangamanga haki wakatafuta visingizio v<strong>ya</strong> kutumia,<br />
wakabaki tu. Mwenye Majmaul-ba<strong>ya</strong>n a<strong>na</strong>sema: “Hivi ndivyo<br />
a<strong>na</strong>vyokuwa yule Mwenye kuhemewa. A<strong>na</strong>sema ni mchawi, mara ni<br />
mshairi, mara a<strong>na</strong>ota. Ha<strong>na</strong> moja a<strong>na</strong>lolishikilia. Huku ndio kujipinga kwa<br />
dhahiri.”<br />
Basi atuletee ishara kama walivyotumwa wale wa mwanzo.<br />
Washirki<strong>na</strong> walimwambia Muhammad (s.a.w.): Ukiwa wewe ni Mtume<br />
basi tuletee muujiza, kama vile ngamia wa Swaleh, fimbo <strong>ya</strong> Musa <strong>na</strong> miujiza<br />
mingineyo <strong>ya</strong> mitume waliopita. Ndio Mwenyezi Mungu akawajibu<br />
kwa kusema:<br />
Hawakuamini kabla <strong>ya</strong>o watu wa mji tuliouangamiza.<br />
Maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> jawabu hili ni kuwa, ni kweli kwamba mitume waliotangulia<br />
walikuja <strong>na</strong> miujiza, kama vile ngamia <strong>na</strong> fimbo, lakini watu wao<br />
hawakuwaamini, bali walikataa <strong>na</strong> wakamakadhibisha, ingawaje wao<br />
wenyewe ndio walioitaka. Kwa ajili hiyo tukawaangamiza.<br />
Kwa hiyo i<strong>na</strong>takiwa enyi washiriki<strong>na</strong> muangalie <strong>na</strong>tija i<strong>na</strong>yofungama<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
miujiza sio muujiza wenyewe. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu itawatokea hivyo hivyo, ikiwa<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu atawakubalia mapendekezo yenu.<br />
Je, wataamini hao.<br />
Yaani wale waliokuwa kabla <strong>ya</strong>o hawakuamini miujiza waliyoipendekeza,<br />
vile vile hawa hawataamini miujiza wa<strong>na</strong>yoipendekeza. Natija itakuwa ni<br />
kuangamizwa, kama walivyoangamizwa wa kwanza; ambapo hekima <strong>ya</strong>ke<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ilipitisha kuwa waangamizwe kwa miujiza waliyoitaka<br />
5
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
7. Na hatukuwatuma kabla <strong>ya</strong>ko<br />
ila wa<strong>na</strong>ume tuliowapa wahyi.<br />
Basi waulizeni wenye kumbukumbu,<br />
hamjui.<br />
ikiwa nyinyi<br />
8. Na hatukuwafan<strong>ya</strong> miili<br />
isiyokula chakula, wala<br />
hawakuwa<br />
milele.<br />
wenye kuishi<br />
9. Kisha tukawatimizia miadi <strong>na</strong><br />
tukawaokoa wao <strong>na</strong><br />
tuliowataka <strong>na</strong><br />
tukawaangamiza<br />
mipaka.<br />
waliopita<br />
10. Hakika tumewateremshia<br />
Kitabu, ndani <strong>ya</strong>ke m<strong>na</strong><br />
ukumbusho wenu. Je, hamtii<br />
akili?<br />
11. Na miji mingapi iliyokuwa<br />
ikidhulumu tumeiteketeza <strong>na</strong><br />
tukawaumba baada <strong>ya</strong>o watu<br />
wengine.<br />
6
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
12. Basi walipohisi adhabu yetu<br />
mara wakaanza kukimbia.<br />
13. Msikimbie! Na rejeeni<br />
kwenye zile zile starehe zenu<br />
<strong>na</strong> maskani zenu mpate<br />
kusailiwa.<br />
14. Wakasema: Ole wetu! Hakika<br />
sisi tulikuwa madhalimu.<br />
15. Hakikuacha hicho kuwa kilio<br />
chao mpaka tukawafan<strong>ya</strong><br />
wamefyekwa wamezimika.<br />
WAULIZENI WENYE KUMBUKUMBU<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 7 – 15<br />
MAANA<br />
Na hatukutuma kabla <strong>ya</strong>ko ila wa<strong>na</strong>ume tuliowapa wahyi. Basi<br />
waulizeni wenye kumbukumbu, ikiwa nyinyi hamjui.<br />
Imekwishatangulia kwa herufi zake katika Juz. 14 (16:43).<br />
Na hatukuwafan<strong>ya</strong> miili isiyokula chakula, wala hawakuwa wenye<br />
kuishi milele.<br />
7
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
wao wenyewe.<br />
Ma<strong>na</strong>bii sio roho bila <strong>ya</strong> miili wala wao hawatakaa maisha hapa duniani.<br />
Wao ni kama watu wengine, hawa<strong>na</strong> tofauti isipokuwa kwa kufikisha neno<br />
la Mungu <strong>na</strong> kwamba wao ni wakamilifu. Angalia Juz. 16 (20: 35) kifungu<br />
‘Hakika <strong>ya</strong> Utume’.<br />
Kisha tukawatimizia miadi <strong>na</strong> tukawaokoa wao <strong>na</strong> tuliowataka <strong>na</strong><br />
tukawaangamiza waliopita mipaka.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) a<strong>na</strong>ishiria kwenye kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke hii pale aliposema:<br />
“Mwenyezi Mungu amekwishaandika: Hakika nitashinda mimi <strong>na</strong> Mitume<br />
wangu.“Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni mwenye nguvu, mwenye kushinda.”<br />
(58:21). Na akasema te<strong>na</strong>:<br />
“Hakika bila shaka tutawanusuru mitume wetu <strong>na</strong> walioamini katika<br />
maisha <strong>ya</strong> duniani <strong>na</strong> siku watakaposimama mashahidi.” (40:51).<br />
Kwa ufupi ni kuwa Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) aliwaahidi mitume <strong>na</strong> waumini<br />
kuokoka <strong>na</strong> makafiri kuangamia. <strong>Al</strong>itekeleza ahadi <strong>ya</strong>ke. Ni <strong>na</strong>ni<br />
kuliko Mwenyezi Mungu katika utekelezaji ahadi?<br />
MUHAMMAD NA WAARABU<br />
Hakika tumewateremshia Kitabu, ndani <strong>ya</strong>ke m<strong>na</strong> ukumbusho wenu.<br />
Je, hamtii akili?<br />
Kabla <strong>ya</strong> Muhammad (s.a.w.) <strong>na</strong> Qur’an waarabu hawakuwa ni chochote.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> vitu viwili hivyo wakawa ni watu mashuhuri, ikatajwa historia <strong>na</strong><br />
8
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
maendeleo <strong>ya</strong>o, wakawa ni watu wa hali <strong>ya</strong> juu.<br />
A<strong>na</strong>sema: W.L. Dewarnet katika Ensaiklopidia <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>ya</strong> Historia <strong>ya</strong> kisa<br />
cha maendeleo katika ulimwengu: “Muhammad ni mkuu miongoni mwa<br />
wakuu wa Historia. <strong>Al</strong>iwainua watu walioishi katika giza la ushenzi, anga<br />
<strong>ya</strong> joto <strong>na</strong> ukame wa jangwa, kwenye ustawi wa kiroho <strong>na</strong> kimaadili.<br />
<strong>Al</strong>ifaulu kwenye lengo hili kwa <strong>na</strong>m<strong>na</strong> ambayo hajawahi kuifikia kiongozi<br />
yeyote katika historia yote.<br />
<strong>Al</strong>ipoanza mwito wake miji <strong>ya</strong> waarabu ilikuwa ni jangwa tupu li<strong>na</strong>lokaliwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> makabila <strong>ya</strong> waabudu mizimu yenye watu wachache wasiokuwa <strong>na</strong><br />
umoja wowote. Lakini kufikia kufa kwake wakawa ni umma wenye<br />
mshikamano, wakiwa wamekiuka ubaguzi <strong>na</strong> upuuzi. Wakawa juu <strong>ya</strong><br />
u<strong>ya</strong>hudi <strong>na</strong> ukiristo <strong>na</strong> dini <strong>ya</strong> nchi<strong>ya</strong>ke ikawa wazi <strong>na</strong> nyepesi. Ikajengeka<br />
misingi <strong>ya</strong> kijasiri, utukufu <strong>na</strong> uzalendo. Kwenye kizazi kimoja tu ikaweza<br />
kushinda vita mia moja <strong>na</strong> katika karne moja ikaweza kuanzisha dola kuu<br />
<strong>na</strong> kubakia hadi leo kuwa ni nguvu kuu ulimwenguni”<br />
Na miji mingapi iliyokuwa ikidhulumu tumeiteketeza <strong>na</strong> tukawaumba<br />
baada <strong>ya</strong>o watu wengine.<br />
Ha<strong>ya</strong> ni makemeo <strong>na</strong> kiaga kwa wale wa<strong>na</strong>omkadhibisha Muhammad<br />
(s.a.w.) kwamba wao <strong>ya</strong>tawapata <strong>ya</strong>liyowapata waliokuwa kabla <strong>ya</strong>o katika<br />
umma zilizowakadhibisha mitume wao. Kisha Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
awalete wengine wasiokuwa <strong>na</strong> uhusiano wowote <strong>na</strong> walioangamizwa;<br />
awarithishe milki zao <strong>na</strong> majumba <strong>ya</strong>o. Wajenge up<strong>ya</strong> <strong>na</strong> wastarehe <strong>na</strong><br />
kheri zake <strong>na</strong> baraka zake.<br />
Basi walipohisi adhabu yetu mara wakaanza kukimbia.<br />
Hii ni taswira <strong>ya</strong> hali <strong>ya</strong> washiriki<strong>na</strong> i<strong>na</strong>powafikia adhabu kutoka mbinguni,<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>jaribu kuikimbia, lakini wapi! I<strong>na</strong>wezeka<strong>na</strong> vipi kuukimbia<br />
utawala wa Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> hukumu <strong>ya</strong>ke? Kama hapo mwanzo wan-<br />
9
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
gelikimbilia kwa Mwenyezi Mungu wangelikuta amani. Ama kumkimbia<br />
yeye Mwenyezi Mungu ni sawa <strong>na</strong> mtu kukimbia kivuli chake.<br />
Msikimbie! Na rejeeni kwenye zile zile starehe zenu <strong>na</strong> maskani zenu<br />
mpate kusailiwa.<br />
Kabla <strong>ya</strong> kuteremshwa adhabu washiriki<strong>na</strong> walikuwa hawajishughulishi <strong>na</strong><br />
lolote zaidi <strong>ya</strong> mali <strong>na</strong> starehe zao, lakini ilipowashukia adhabu, nyoyo <strong>na</strong><br />
akili zao zilipofuka <strong>na</strong> wakatupilia mbali kila kitu. Ndio Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
(s.w.t.) akawaambia kwa kuwataha<strong>ya</strong>riza: M<strong>na</strong>enda wapi? Rudini kwenye<br />
mali zenu <strong>na</strong> watoto wenu. Leo m<strong>na</strong>ziacha <strong>na</strong> ja<strong>na</strong> mlikuwa mkiziabudu<br />
badala <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu? Ha<strong>ya</strong> ndio malipo <strong>ya</strong> a<strong>na</strong>yeacha uongofu <strong>na</strong><br />
asiongoke kwenye uongofu.<br />
Wakasema: Ole wetu! Hakika sisi tulikuwa madhalimu.<br />
Walitulia <strong>na</strong> starehe zao, wakaitikia matamanio <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong> wakamtuhumu<br />
a<strong>na</strong>yewapa <strong>na</strong>saha, lakini walipoio<strong>na</strong> adhabu walijuta <strong>na</strong> wakaita ole wetu,<br />
lakini majuto ni mjuukuu ha<strong>ya</strong>rudishi <strong>ya</strong>liyopita.<br />
Hakikuacha hicho kuwa kilio chao mpaka tukawafan<strong>ya</strong> wamefyekwa<br />
wamezimika.<br />
Wa<strong>na</strong>lia ole wetu <strong>na</strong> adhabu iko kichwani mwao ikiendelea. Haikufaa mali<br />
wala jaha. Huo ndio mwisho wa wakosefu.<br />
10
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 15 15. Sura Israi<br />
16. Na hatukuziumba mbingu <strong>na</strong><br />
ardhi <strong>na</strong> vilivyomo bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>o<br />
kwa mchezo.<br />
17. Kama tungelitaka kufan<strong>ya</strong><br />
mchezo tungelijifanyia sisi<br />
wenyewe, kama tungekuwa ni<br />
wafan<strong>ya</strong>o mchezo.<br />
18. Bali tu<strong>na</strong>itupa haki juu <strong>ya</strong><br />
batili ikaivunja <strong>na</strong> mara ikatoweka.<br />
Na ole wenu kwa<br />
m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>sifia .<br />
19. Ni v<strong>ya</strong>ke vilivyoko mbinguni<br />
<strong>na</strong> ardhini <strong>na</strong> walioko mbele<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke hawafanyi kiburi<br />
wakaacha kumwabudu wala<br />
hawachoki.<br />
20. Wa<strong>na</strong>msabihi usiku <strong>na</strong><br />
mcha<strong>na</strong><br />
g’onyei.<br />
wala hawanyo-<br />
21. Au wamepata miungu katika<br />
ardhi i<strong>na</strong>yofufua.<br />
11
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
22. Lau wangelikuwemo humo<br />
miungu wengine isipokuwa<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu basi zingefisidika.<br />
Ametasika Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu, Mola wa arshi, <strong>na</strong><br />
hayo wa<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>sifu.<br />
23. Yeye haulizwi kwa a<strong>ya</strong>ten-<br />
dayo <strong>na</strong> wao ndio waulizwao<br />
kwa wa<strong>ya</strong>tendayo.<br />
JE, VITENDO VYAKE MWENYEZI MUNGU MTUKUFU VINA<br />
MALENGO?<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 16 – 23<br />
MAANA<br />
Na hatukuziumba mbingu <strong>na</strong> ardhi <strong>na</strong> vilivyomo bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>o kwa<br />
mchezo.<br />
Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 4 (3: 191). Huko tumenukuu kauli<br />
kuhusia<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> kuwa je, vitendo v<strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu vi<strong>na</strong>kuwa <strong>na</strong> <strong>saba</strong>bu<br />
<strong>ya</strong> malengo au kwake Mwenyezi Mungu haku<strong>na</strong> uba<strong>ya</strong> wala ha<strong>na</strong> wajibu<br />
wa chochote?<br />
Kama tungelitaka kufan<strong>ya</strong> mchezo tungelijifanyia sisi wenyewe, kama<br />
tungekuwa ni wafan<strong>ya</strong>o mchezo.<br />
Mchezo <strong>na</strong> upuuzi ni muhali kwa yule a<strong>na</strong>yekiambia kitu kuwa <strong>na</strong> kikawa.<br />
Ndio maa<strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu Mtukufu akasema: ‘Lau tungelitaka ...<br />
12
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
kama tungekuwa ni wafan<strong>ya</strong>o mchezo’ <strong>ya</strong>ani hatukataka wala hatufanyi.<br />
Lau angelitaka kufan<strong>ya</strong> mchezo – kukadiria muhali sio muhali – angelijifanyia<br />
kwa <strong>na</strong>m<strong>na</strong> yoyote i<strong>na</strong>yolinga<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> cheo chake; sio katika <strong>na</strong>m<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong><br />
waja; kama kucheza <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>wake <strong>na</strong> watoto.<br />
Bali tu<strong>na</strong>itupa haki juu <strong>ya</strong> batili ikaivunja <strong>na</strong> mara ikatoweka.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> haki hapa ni ukweli <strong>na</strong> uhakika kwa mkabala wa mchezo<br />
alioukanusha Mwenyezi Mungu Mtukufu <strong>na</strong> makusudio <strong>ya</strong> batili hapa ni<br />
upuzi <strong>na</strong> mchezo.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu Mtukufu kusema hatufanyi mchezo sasa<br />
a<strong>na</strong>sema kuwa vitendo v<strong>ya</strong>ke kwake ni uhakika <strong>na</strong> ukweli si mchezo <strong>na</strong><br />
upuzi; bali ukija upuzi <strong>na</strong> mchezo kutoka popote a<strong>na</strong>uvunjilia mbali. Vipi<br />
ataliridhia lile asiloliridhia kwa mwingine?<br />
Na ole wenu kwa m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>sifia <strong>na</strong>yo Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> kumbandika<br />
sifa za kutengeneza.<br />
Ni v<strong>ya</strong>ke vilivyoko mbinguni <strong>na</strong> ardhini <strong>na</strong> walioko mbele <strong>ya</strong>ke<br />
hawafanyi kiburi wakaacha kumwabudu wala hawachoki.<br />
Wafasiri wa<strong>na</strong>sema kuwa makusudio <strong>ya</strong> walioko mbele <strong>ya</strong>ke, ni Malaika.<br />
Tu<strong>na</strong>vyofahamu sisi ni kuwa makusudio ni kila mwenye cheo <strong>na</strong> jaha<br />
mbele <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu, awe Malaika au mtu.<br />
Wa<strong>na</strong>msabihi usiku <strong>na</strong> mcha<strong>na</strong> wala hawanyonyog’onyei.<br />
Yaani hawachoki, bali wa<strong>na</strong>dumu kwenye twaa katika kauli <strong>na</strong> vitendo<br />
wala hawamtuhumu Mwenyezi Mungu kwa kumsawirisha au kumpa sifa<br />
za kutengeneza.<br />
Au wamepata miungu katika ardhi i<strong>na</strong>yofufua.<br />
13
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Yaani kila a<strong>na</strong>yeabudiwa <strong>na</strong> washiriki<strong>na</strong>, hawezi kuhui wafu wala hawafufui<br />
wafu walio makaburini, bali Mwenyezi Mungu peke <strong>ya</strong>ke ndiye<br />
a<strong>na</strong>yehui <strong>na</strong> kufisha.<br />
Lau wangelikuwemo humo miungu wengine isipokuwa Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu basi zingefisidika. Ametasika Mwenyezi Mungu, Mola wa<br />
arshi, <strong>na</strong> hayo wa<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>zua.<br />
Tazama tuliyo<strong>ya</strong>andika kwenye Juz. 5 (4:48) Kifungu ‘Dalili <strong>ya</strong> umoja <strong>na</strong><br />
utatu.’<br />
Mwenye kujua ni hoja kwa asiyejua<br />
Yeye hahojiwi kwa a<strong>ya</strong>tendayo <strong>na</strong> wao ndio wa<strong>na</strong>ohojiwa kwa wa<strong>ya</strong>tendayo.<br />
Baadhi wametoa dalili kwa A<strong>ya</strong> hii kwamba haku<strong>na</strong> uba<strong>ya</strong> kwa Mungu<br />
wala hawajibikiwi <strong>na</strong> jambo lolote. A<strong>na</strong>weza kumwadhibu mtiifu <strong>na</strong> kumlipa<br />
thawabu muasi. Lakini hii i<strong>na</strong>pinga<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> uadilifu wake, hekima <strong>na</strong><br />
rehema <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Usahihi hasa ni kuwa maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> ni Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) kwa<br />
kuwa ni mwadilifu kwa dhati <strong>ya</strong>ke, haijuzu kwa yeyote kumwingilia kwa<br />
kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> vitendo v<strong>ya</strong>ke. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu haijuzu kuambiwa mwadilifu,<br />
kwa nini umefan<strong>ya</strong> uadilifu? Na mkweli, kuambiwa kwa nini umesema<br />
kweli? Kama ambavyo haifai kwa asiyejua utabibu kumwambia tabibu<br />
hodari, kwa nini u<strong>na</strong>toa dawa hii?<br />
Mfano wa maswali ha<strong>ya</strong> u<strong>na</strong>faa kwa aliye kifani wake. Ama asiyejua kitu,<br />
a<strong>na</strong>lotakiwa ni kufan<strong>ya</strong> juhudi <strong>ya</strong> kumtafuta mjuzi <strong>na</strong> kuhakikisha ujuzi<br />
wake kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> dalili <strong>na</strong> alama. Akishapata uhakika basi i<strong>na</strong>kuwa ni<br />
wajibu kwake kumfuata kwa <strong>ya</strong>le aliyo <strong>na</strong> ujuzi <strong>na</strong>yo; sawa <strong>na</strong> mgonjwa<br />
a<strong>na</strong>vyomfuata tabibu. Walikwishasema wahenga: “Ajuaye ni hoja kwa<br />
14
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
asiyejua.” Ikiwa mambo ni hivi kwa kiumbe pamoja <strong>na</strong> kiumbe mwenzake.<br />
Itakuwaje kwa kiumbe pamoja <strong>na</strong> muumba wa mbingu <strong>na</strong> ardhi?<br />
Siku moja mwa<strong>na</strong>funzi alimuuliza mwalimu wake: “Kwa nini tuko <strong>na</strong> kwa<br />
nini tu<strong>na</strong>ishi?”<br />
Mwalimu akamwambia mwa<strong>na</strong>funzi wake: “Kwa nini ewe mwa<strong>na</strong>ngu<br />
u<strong>na</strong>jilazimisha <strong>na</strong> mambo <strong>ya</strong>siyokuwa <strong>na</strong> mwanzo wala mwisho? Kwa nini<br />
usiamini dini ikastarehe <strong>na</strong>fsi <strong>ya</strong>ko <strong>na</strong> uawache <strong>ya</strong>le usiyo<strong>ya</strong>weza, ufuate<br />
u<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>weza? Wewe ni mmoja wa maelfu <strong>ya</strong> mamilioni <strong>ya</strong> watu <strong>na</strong> mji<br />
wako ua<strong>na</strong>oishi ni moja <strong>ya</strong> maelfu <strong>ya</strong> miji. Ardhi tu<strong>na</strong>yoishi ni moja <strong>ya</strong><br />
mamilioni <strong>ya</strong> sa<strong>ya</strong>ri <strong>na</strong> ulimwengu ulio <strong>na</strong> sa<strong>ya</strong>ri zote hizo, hatujui kuwa<br />
ku<strong>na</strong> mfano wake u<strong>na</strong>ouzidia. Je, sehemu moja i<strong>na</strong>weza kudhibiti yote<br />
hayo? Je, tone moja li<strong>na</strong>weza kuihoji bahari?<br />
Mwa<strong>na</strong>ngu! Mimi sisemi kuwa usifanye uchunguzi <strong>na</strong> kupeleleza, kwani<br />
kutafuta hakika ni miongoni mwa <strong>saba</strong>bu za kupatika<strong>na</strong> bi<strong>na</strong>damu, lakini<br />
maadamu akili <strong>ya</strong>ko ni ndogo kuweza kufahamu hakika hiyo, basi ngoja<br />
mpaka uzidi kupata ufahamu <strong>na</strong> utambuzi. Mwisho ukishindwa, liache<br />
jambo kama lilivyo. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu udogo wa akili <strong>ya</strong>ko kufahamu jambo,<br />
haimaanishi kuwa jambo hilo ni mchezo <strong>na</strong> upuzi; isipokuwa i<strong>na</strong>maanisha<br />
kuwa hujalifahamu; kwa hiyo muachie aliyeumba vyote vilivyoko.”<br />
24. Au wamejifanyia miungu<br />
mingine badala <strong>ya</strong>ke. Sema,<br />
leteni dalili yenu. Hii ni<br />
ukumbusho wa walio pamoja<br />
<strong>na</strong>mi <strong>na</strong> ukumbusho wa<br />
waliokuwa kabla <strong>ya</strong>ngu.<br />
Lakini wengi wao hawajui<br />
haki kwa hiyo wa<strong>na</strong>puuza.<br />
15
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
25. Na hatukumtuma kabla <strong>ya</strong>ko<br />
Mtume yeyote ila tulimpa<br />
wahyi kwamba hapa<strong>na</strong><br />
Mungu isipokuwa mimi, basi<br />
niabuduni mimi tu.<br />
26. Na wa<strong>na</strong>sema, Mwingi wa<br />
rehema a<strong>na</strong> mwa<strong>na</strong>!<br />
Ametakasika <strong>na</strong> hayo! Bali<br />
hao ni waja waliotukuzwa.<br />
27. Hawamtangulii kwa neno <strong>na</strong>o<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>fan<strong>ya</strong> kwa amri <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
28. A<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong>jua <strong>ya</strong>liyo mbele <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong><br />
<strong>ya</strong>liyo nyuma <strong>ya</strong>o. Wala<br />
hawamuombei yeyote ila yule<br />
a<strong>na</strong>yemridhia. Nao kwa ajili<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kumwogopa<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>nyenyekea.<br />
16
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
29. Na yeyote miongoni mwao<br />
atakayesema: mimi ni<br />
mungu, badala <strong>ya</strong>ke, basi<br />
tutamlipa Jahan<strong>na</strong>mu. Hivyo<br />
ndivyo tu<strong>na</strong>vyowalipa madhalimu.<br />
LETENI DALILI ZENU<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 24 – 29<br />
MAANA<br />
Au wamejifanyia miungu mingine badala <strong>ya</strong>ke. Sema leteni dalili<br />
yenu.<br />
Kila mtu huwa a<strong>na</strong>sema, mwenye kudai ni lazima alete ushahidi; hata<br />
kama yule a<strong>na</strong>yeelekezewa madai ni mtu duni; sikwambii akiwa ni mshirika<br />
wa Mwenyezi Mungu katika viumbe v<strong>ya</strong>ke. Basi iko wapi dalili?<br />
Hii Qur’an ni ukumbusho wa walio pamoja <strong>na</strong>mi <strong>na</strong> ukumbusho wa<br />
waliokuwa kabla <strong>ya</strong>ngu.<br />
Vitabu vyote v<strong>ya</strong> mbinguni vi<strong>na</strong>amrisha Tawhid <strong>na</strong> kukataza shirki. Ikiwa<br />
shirki hai<strong>na</strong> dalili <strong>ya</strong> kiakili wala <strong>ya</strong> ki<strong>na</strong>kili, basi chimbuko lake ni ujinga<br />
<strong>na</strong> upofu.<br />
Lakini wengi wao hawajui haki kwa hiyo wa<strong>na</strong>puuza.<br />
Hii ni kukemea ujinga wao <strong>na</strong> upotevu wao.<br />
Na hatukumtuma kabla <strong>ya</strong>ko Mtume yoyote ila tulimpa wahyi kwamba<br />
hapa<strong>na</strong> Mungu isipokuwa mimi, basi niabuduni mimi tu.<br />
17
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
A<strong>ya</strong> hii ni ubainifu <strong>na</strong> tafsiri <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> iliyo kabla <strong>ya</strong>ke. Ya kwanza i<strong>na</strong>sema<br />
kuwa haku<strong>na</strong> athari yoyote <strong>ya</strong> shirki katika vitabu v<strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
<strong>na</strong> hii i<strong>na</strong>sema kuwa hakutumwa mtume yeyote isipokuwa kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong><br />
tawhidi <strong>na</strong> kumfanyia ikhlasi Mwenyezi Mungu katika ibada.<br />
Na wa<strong>na</strong>sema, Mwingi wa rehema a<strong>na</strong> mwa<strong>na</strong>. Ametakasika <strong>na</strong> hayo!<br />
Bali hao ni waja wa waliotukuzwa.<br />
Ma<strong>ya</strong>hudi au kikundi katika wao walisema kuwa Uzayr ni mwa<strong>na</strong> wa<br />
Mungu, Wa<strong>na</strong>swara (wakiristo) wakasema Masih ni mwa<strong>na</strong> wa Mungu; <strong>na</strong><br />
baadhi <strong>ya</strong> makabila <strong>ya</strong> kiarabu <strong>ya</strong>kasema kuwa Malaika ni mabinti wa<br />
Mungu. Ndio Mwenyezi Mungu akawarudi wote hao, kwamba mliowataja<br />
ni waja sio watoto, te<strong>na</strong> wao wa<strong>na</strong> daraja <strong>na</strong> cheo mbele <strong>ya</strong> Mola wao.<br />
Ajabu ni <strong>ya</strong>le <strong>ya</strong>liyoelezwa katika Tafsiri At-Tabari, akiwanukuu waliosema<br />
kuwa Malaika ni mabinti wa Mwenyezi Mungu: “Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
alimuoa jini akamzalia Malaika.” Hili ameliashiria Mwenyezi Mungu katika<br />
kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke:<br />
“Na wameweka mahusiano <strong>ya</strong> <strong>na</strong><strong>saba</strong> bai<strong>na</strong> Yake <strong>na</strong> majini” (37: 158).<br />
Kisha Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) akabainisha <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> daraja <strong>ya</strong> Uzayr,<br />
Masih <strong>na</strong> Malaika mbele <strong>ya</strong>ke, kwa kusema: Hawamtangulii kwa neno<br />
<strong>na</strong>o wa<strong>na</strong>fan<strong>ya</strong> kwa amri <strong>ya</strong>ke. Yaani wao hawatumii rai wala kiasi.<br />
A<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong>jua <strong>ya</strong>liyo mbele <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>liyo nyuma <strong>ya</strong>o.<br />
Yaliyo mbele <strong>ya</strong>o ni fumbo la vitendo v<strong>ya</strong>o v<strong>ya</strong> sasa <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>liyo nyuma <strong>ya</strong>o<br />
ni vitendo v<strong>ya</strong>o vilivyopita. Maa<strong>na</strong> ni kuwa Yeye Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
a<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong>jua vizuri matendo <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>ya</strong> kheri <strong>na</strong> makusudio <strong>ya</strong>o mazuri; <strong>na</strong>ye<br />
atawalipa ujira wao kwa <strong>ya</strong>le mazuri waliyo<strong>ya</strong>fan<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
18
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Wala hawamuombei yeyote ila yule a<strong>na</strong>yemridhia Yeye.<br />
Hii ni kumrudi yule a<strong>na</strong>yemwabudu Mtume, walii au Malaika kwa tamaa<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kuombewa kwa Mungu. Kwa maa<strong>na</strong> kwamba waja waliotukuzwa<br />
watawaombea wale wenye kuridhiwa <strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu sio washiriki<strong>na</strong><br />
walioghadhibikiwa.<br />
Nao kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> kumwogopa wa<strong>na</strong>nyenyekea pamoja <strong>na</strong> kuwa wa<strong>na</strong><br />
ikhlasi <strong>na</strong> vyeo mbele <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu.<br />
Na yeyote miongoni mwao atakayesema: mimi ni mungu, badala <strong>ya</strong>ke,<br />
basi tutamlipa Jahan<strong>na</strong>mu. Hivyo ndivyo tu<strong>na</strong>vyowalipa madhalimu.<br />
Hao waja wema waliotukuzwa, lau mmoja atadai kuwa yeye ni mungu<br />
badala <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu au ni mshirika wake, basi malipo <strong>ya</strong>ke<br />
<strong>ya</strong>takuwa ni Jahan<strong>na</strong>mu, kama washiriki<strong>na</strong> wengine, bila <strong>ya</strong> kuwa <strong>na</strong><br />
tofauti yoyote.<br />
30. Je, hao waliokufuru<br />
hawakuo<strong>na</strong> kwamba mbingu<br />
<strong>na</strong> ardhi zilikuwa zimeambata<strong>na</strong>,<br />
kisha tukaziambua? Na<br />
tukajaalia kwa maji kila kilicho<br />
hai. Je, hawaamini?<br />
31. Na tukaweka katika ardhi<br />
milima ili isiwayumbishe. Na<br />
tukaweka humo upa<strong>na</strong> wa<br />
njia ili wapate kuongoka.<br />
19
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
32. Na tukaifan<strong>ya</strong> mbingu kuwa<br />
sakafu iliyohifadhiwa, lakini<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>zipuuza ishara.<br />
33. Na Yeye ndiye aliyeumba<br />
usiku <strong>na</strong> mcha<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> jua <strong>na</strong><br />
mwezi. Kila kimoja katika<br />
anga vi<strong>na</strong>ogoelea.<br />
34. Na hatukumjaalia mtu yeyote<br />
wa kabla <strong>ya</strong>ko kuishi milele.<br />
Je, ukifa wewe wao wataishi<br />
milelele?<br />
35. Kila <strong>na</strong>fsi itaonja mauti. Na<br />
tutawajaribu kwa mtihani wa<br />
shari <strong>na</strong> kheri <strong>na</strong> kwetu<br />
mtarejeshwa.<br />
36. Na wa<strong>na</strong>pokuo<strong>na</strong> wale ambao<br />
wamekufuru hawakufanyii<br />
ila mzaha: Je, huyu ndiye<br />
a<strong>na</strong>yewataja miungu wenu?<br />
20
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Na hao ndio wa<strong>na</strong>okataa<br />
dhikri <strong>ya</strong> Mwingi wa rehema.<br />
MAJI NI UHAI<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 30 – 36.<br />
MAANA<br />
Je, hao waliokufuru hawakuo<strong>na</strong> kwamba mbingu <strong>na</strong> ardhi zilikuwa<br />
zimeambata<strong>na</strong>, kisha tukazibandua?<br />
Mwanzoni mwa <strong>Juzuu</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kwanza tumefafanua maelezo yenye kichwa cha<br />
maneno ‘Qur’an <strong>na</strong> sa<strong>ya</strong>nsi,’ tukasema kuwa Qur’an ni kitabu cha dini<br />
ki<strong>na</strong>chomwongoza mtu kwenye ufanisi wake wa kidunia <strong>na</strong> akhera; <strong>na</strong><br />
wala sio kitabu cha <strong>na</strong>dharia za falsafa, sa<strong>ya</strong>nsi au falaki n.k. Na kwamba<br />
kila A<strong>ya</strong> miongoni mwa a<strong>ya</strong> za Qur’an za kilimwengu au za kihistoria,<br />
kama vile visa v<strong>ya</strong> mitume, lengo lake ni kutupa mawaidha <strong>na</strong> mafunzo au<br />
kutuongoza kujua kuweko Mwenyezi Mungu, tuweze kumwamini.<br />
Miongoni mwa A<strong>ya</strong> za kilimwengu ni hii tuliyo <strong>na</strong>yo. Humo Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu (s.w.t.) ametaja mambo mawili: Kwanza, kwamba sa<strong>ya</strong>ri za Jua,<br />
ikiwemo Jua, Ardhi, Mars, Jupita, Zohali, Zebaki n.k. Zote zilikuwa<br />
zimeshika<strong>na</strong> kama kitu kimoja, kisha Mwenyezi Mungu akazipambanua <strong>na</strong><br />
kila moja akaifan<strong>ya</strong> ni sa<strong>ya</strong>ri peke <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Wataalamu wameikubali <strong>na</strong>dharia <strong>ya</strong> kubanduka Jua <strong>na</strong> Ardhi, lakini<br />
wakatofautia<strong>na</strong> katika <strong>na</strong>m<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kubanduka kwake. Qur’an <strong>na</strong>yo haikufafanua<br />
kuhusu ai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kubanduka kwake. Nasi tu<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong>n<strong>ya</strong>mazia <strong>ya</strong>le aliyo<strong>ya</strong>n<strong>ya</strong>mazia<br />
Mungu.<br />
Na tukajaalia kwa maji kila kilicho hai.<br />
Hili ni jambo la pili lilotajwa <strong>na</strong> A<strong>ya</strong>. Kwamba maji ndio chimbuko la kila<br />
21
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
kitu ki<strong>na</strong>chokua; awe ni mtu, mn<strong>ya</strong>ma au mmea.<br />
Katika Juz. 12 (11:7) Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong>sema: “Naye ndiye aliyeumba<br />
mbingu <strong>na</strong> ardhi katika siku sita <strong>na</strong> arshi <strong>ya</strong>ke ilikuwa juu <strong>ya</strong> maji.” Huko<br />
tumezungumzia kuwa makusudio <strong>ya</strong> Arshi ni miliki <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> utawala wake<br />
<strong>na</strong> kwamba maji <strong>ya</strong>likuwako kabla <strong>ya</strong> kuumbwa mbingu <strong>na</strong> ardhi.<br />
Miongoni mwa kauli za Ahlu bayt (a.s.) ni kuwa maji ndio <strong>ya</strong> kwanza<br />
kuumbwa <strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu. Ikiwa elimu hivi leo haijaugundua uhakika<br />
huu, lakini i<strong>na</strong>wezeka<strong>na</strong> ikaugundua kesho <strong>ya</strong> karibu au <strong>ya</strong> mbali.<br />
Amenukuu Abul-ha<strong>ya</strong>n <strong>Al</strong>-andalusi katika Bahrul-muhit, kwamba Hamid<br />
amesoma: ‘Tumejalia maji kuwa ni uhai wa kila kitu.’ Kisomo hiki ki<strong>na</strong>tilia<br />
nguvu kuwa maji ndiyo <strong>ya</strong>liyoumbwa mwanzo <strong>na</strong> ndio chimbuko la<br />
kwanza la kila kitu, <strong>na</strong> kwamba kila kitu ki<strong>na</strong> uhai, kiwe ki<strong>na</strong>kua au<br />
hakikui hata kama kwa dhahiri ki<strong>na</strong>oneka<strong>na</strong> kimeganda.<br />
Je, hawaamini baada <strong>ya</strong> dalili zote hizi <strong>na</strong> ubainifu?<br />
Na tukaweka katika ardhi milima ili isiwayumbishe. Na tukaweka<br />
humo upa<strong>na</strong> wa njia ili wapate kuongoka.<br />
mahali pengine imesemwa:<br />
“Ili mtembee humo katika njia pa<strong>na</strong>” (71:20)<br />
Imetangulizwa njia ndio ukaja upa<strong>na</strong>. Maa<strong>na</strong> yote nisawa.<br />
Yaani Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) ameweka njia pa<strong>na</strong> ardhini ili watu wazitumie<br />
kwenye makusudio <strong>ya</strong>o. Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 14:<br />
(16: 15).<br />
Na tukaifan<strong>ya</strong> mbingu kuwa sakafu iliyohifadhiwa, lakini wa<strong>na</strong>zipuuza<br />
ishara.<br />
Kuwa sakafu maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ke ni kama sakafu. Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> iliyohifadhiwa<br />
22
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
hapa ni kubakia sa<strong>ya</strong>ri sehemu <strong>ya</strong>ke kwa nguvu <strong>ya</strong> mvutano. Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu (s.w.t.) a<strong>na</strong>sema:<br />
“Na a<strong>na</strong>zizuia mbingu zisianguke juu ardhi.” (22:65).<br />
Kuzuia kumetegemezwa kwa Mwenyezi Mungu kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu yeye ndio<br />
<strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> <strong>saba</strong>bu zote. Maa<strong>na</strong> ni kuwa nidhamu hii <strong>ya</strong> undani katika<br />
kuumba mbingu ni dalili mkataa, kwa wenye akili, <strong>ya</strong> kuweko muumbji,<br />
umoja wake, uweza wake, ujuzi <strong>na</strong> hekima <strong>ya</strong>ke. Lakini watu wengi<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>zipinga ishara za Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> dalili zake wakipondokea<br />
kwenye hawa zao <strong>na</strong> ladha zao.<br />
Na Yeye ndiye aliyeumba usiku <strong>na</strong> mcha<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> jua <strong>na</strong> mwezi.<br />
Kila kimoja kati <strong>ya</strong> usiku, mcha<strong>na</strong>, jua <strong>na</strong> mwezi ki<strong>na</strong> uhusiano mkubwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> bi<strong>na</strong>damu. Mcha<strong>na</strong> ni wa kujishughulisha, usiku ni wa kupumzika <strong>na</strong><br />
kutulia, jua <strong>na</strong> mwezi ni kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> mwanga, hisabu <strong>na</strong> faida nyinginezo.<br />
Hayo yote ni neema kubwa kwa waja Wake <strong>na</strong> nguvu <strong>ya</strong> hoja <strong>ya</strong> ukuu wa<br />
usultani Wake.<br />
Kila kimoja katika anga vi<strong>na</strong>ogoelea.<br />
Kila sa<strong>ya</strong>ri i<strong>na</strong>zunguka kwa vipimo <strong>na</strong> harakati zi<strong>na</strong>zooa<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong>yo.<br />
U<strong>na</strong>weza kuuliza: Ikiwa tutakadiria kusema kila kimoja basi tungesema<br />
‘ki<strong>na</strong>ogelea,’ sasa ku<strong>na</strong> wajihi gani wa kusema vi<strong>na</strong>ogelea?<br />
Wafasiri wameleta majibu mengi, lenye nguvu zaidi ni lile li<strong>na</strong>losema:<br />
Kila moja kati <strong>ya</strong> mwezi <strong>na</strong> jua ki<strong>na</strong> matilai <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> mashukio <strong>ya</strong>ke. Kwa<br />
hiyo Mwenyezi Mungu akarudisha dhamiri <strong>ya</strong> wingi kwa kuzingatia hayo.<br />
Na hatukumjaalia mtu yeyote wa kabla <strong>ya</strong>ko kuishi milele. Je, ukifa<br />
23
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
wewe wao wataishi milelele?<br />
Tabrasi amesema: “Washiriki<strong>na</strong> wa kikuraishi waliposhindwa <strong>na</strong><br />
Muhammad (s.a.w.) walisema tumngoje afe, ndipo ikashuka A<strong>ya</strong> hii kuwajibu<br />
kuwa haku<strong>na</strong> yeyote atakayeokoka <strong>na</strong> mauti. Je, mtume akifa nyinyi<br />
washiriki<strong>na</strong> hamtakufa?<br />
Mfumo wa A<strong>ya</strong> haukatai aliyo<strong>ya</strong>sema Tabrasi.<br />
Kila <strong>na</strong>fsi itaonja mauti.<br />
Haku<strong>na</strong> wa ku<strong>ya</strong>kimbia mauti. Mauti mazuri ni <strong>ya</strong>le <strong>ya</strong> kufa shahidi kwa<br />
ajili <strong>ya</strong> kuitafuta haki <strong>na</strong> kuibatilisha batili.<br />
Na tutawajaribu kwa mtihani wa shari <strong>na</strong> kheri <strong>na</strong> kwetu mtarejeshwa.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) huwapa mtihani waja wake kwa wa<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>penda<br />
<strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>chukia, ili idhihiri hakika <strong>ya</strong> kila mtu. Yule atakayeshukuru<br />
wakati wa raha, akavumilia wakati wa shida, basi huyo ni katika waumini<br />
wenye ikhlasi <strong>na</strong> atakuwa <strong>na</strong> malipo <strong>ya</strong> thawabu. Na yule mwenye<br />
kukufuru <strong>na</strong> akajivu<strong>na</strong>, basi huyo ni katika wale waliothibitikiwa <strong>na</strong><br />
adhabu.<br />
I<strong>na</strong>semeka<strong>na</strong> kuwa Amirul-mu’minin, <strong>Al</strong>i, aliugua. Wenzake wakaja kumtazama<br />
<strong>na</strong> wakamuuliza: “Vipi hali <strong>ya</strong>ko ewe Amirul-muminin?”<br />
Akasema: “Ni shari tu.” Wakasema: “Maneno ha<strong>ya</strong> ha<strong>ya</strong>semwi <strong>na</strong> mtu<br />
mfano wako!” Akasema: “Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong>sema: Na tutawajaribu<br />
kwa mtihani wa shari <strong>na</strong> kheri. Kwa hiyo kheri ni af<strong>ya</strong> <strong>na</strong> kujitosheleza <strong>na</strong><br />
shari ni ufukara <strong>na</strong> ugonjwa.”<br />
Pia Amirul-muminin amesema: “Ambaye dunia <strong>ya</strong>ke itamnyookea <strong>na</strong> asijue<br />
kuwa a<strong>na</strong>fanyiwa vitimbi, basi imedanganyika akili <strong>ya</strong>ke.”<br />
24
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Neno mtihani katika A<strong>ya</strong> ni kutilia mkazo neno tutawajaribu.<br />
Na wa<strong>na</strong>pokuo<strong>na</strong> wale ambao wamekufuru hawakufanyii ila mzaha:<br />
“Je, huyu ndiye a<strong>na</strong>yewataja miungu wenu?.” Na hao ndio<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>okataa dhikri <strong>ya</strong> Mwingi wa rehema.<br />
Wamemkataa Mwenyezi Mungu wakaamini mawe. Mtume akawaita<br />
kwenye imani <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu mmoja aliye peke <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> waachane<br />
<strong>na</strong> mawe. Lakini wakamfanyia masikhara yeye <strong>na</strong> mwito wake wa haki<br />
iliyo wazi, kwamba masa<strong>na</strong>mu <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong> mawe <strong>ya</strong>o ha<strong>ya</strong>dhuru wala ha<strong>ya</strong>nufaishi.<br />
Baadhi <strong>ya</strong>o wamesema: “Hili ni jambo la ajabu kabisa.” Lakini haku<strong>na</strong><br />
ajabu, hii ni kawaida <strong>ya</strong> kila ambaye amechotwa <strong>na</strong> manufaa <strong>na</strong> masilahi<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kibi<strong>na</strong>fsi <strong>na</strong> akakua katika malezi <strong>ya</strong> kuiga mazingira, mababa <strong>na</strong><br />
mababu; ni sawa uigizaji huo uwe ni wa kuabudu mawe au kung’ang’ania<br />
rai bila <strong>ya</strong> elimu wala muongozo. Na nisawa malengo <strong>ya</strong>we ni mali au jaha.<br />
Wote hali moja.<br />
37. Mtu amaeumbwa <strong>na</strong> haraka.<br />
Nitawaonyesha ishara zangu,<br />
basi msiniharakishe.<br />
38. Na wa<strong>na</strong>sema: Ahadi hii itatokea<br />
lini, ikiwa nyinyi<br />
m<strong>na</strong>sema kweli?<br />
25
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
39. Lau wangelijua wale ambao<br />
wamekufuru wakati ambao<br />
hawatauzuia moto <strong>na</strong> nyuso<br />
zao wala migongo <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong> wala<br />
hawatanusuriwa.<br />
40. Bali kitawafikia ghafla, <strong>na</strong><br />
kitawashtua <strong>na</strong> wala<br />
hawataweza kukirudisha<br />
wala hawatapewa muda.<br />
41. Na hakika walifanyiwa stihzai<br />
Mitume kabla <strong>ya</strong>ko, kwa<br />
hiyo <strong>ya</strong>kawazinga wale waliofan<strong>ya</strong><br />
miongoni mwao <strong>ya</strong>le<br />
waliyokuwa waki<strong>ya</strong>fanyia<br />
sthizai.<br />
42. Sema ni <strong>na</strong>ni atakayewalinda<br />
usiku <strong>na</strong> mcha<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> Mwingi<br />
wa rehema? Bali wao wa<strong>na</strong>puuza<br />
kumkumbuka Mola<br />
wao.<br />
26
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
43. Au wao wa<strong>na</strong> miungu<br />
watakaoweza kuwakinga<br />
<strong>na</strong>si. Hao hawawezi kujinusuru<br />
wala hawatahifadhiwa<br />
<strong>na</strong>si.<br />
44. Bali tuliwastarehesha hawa<br />
<strong>na</strong> baba zao mpaka umri<br />
ukawa mrefu. Je, hawaoni<br />
kuwa tu<strong>na</strong>ifikia ardhi tukiipunguza<br />
ncha zake; basi je,<br />
hao ni wenye kushinda?<br />
MTU AMEUMBWA NA HARAKA<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 37 – 44<br />
LUGHA<br />
Ku<strong>na</strong> tofauti bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> haraka <strong>na</strong> upesi upesi (chapuchapu). Haraka ni<br />
kufan<strong>ya</strong> jambo kabla <strong>ya</strong> wakati wake. Upesi upesi ni kulifan<strong>ya</strong> jambo mara<br />
tu u<strong>na</strong>pofika wakati wake bila <strong>ya</strong> ngojangoja. Kulifan<strong>ya</strong> jambo upesi upesi<br />
ku<strong>na</strong>sifika. Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong>sema:<br />
“Wa<strong>na</strong>fan<strong>ya</strong> upesiupeesi mambo <strong>ya</strong> kheri <strong>na</strong> hao ndio miongoni mwa watu<br />
wema.” Juz.4 (3:114)<br />
27
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Ku<strong>na</strong> kauli masuhuri isemayo: ‘Haraka i<strong>na</strong>toka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> shetani’ 2<br />
MAANA<br />
Mtu amaeumbwa <strong>na</strong> haraka. Nitawaonyesha ishara zangu, basi msiniharakishe.<br />
Mtume (s.a.w.) aliwahadharisha makafiri <strong>na</strong> matokeo <strong>ya</strong> ukafiri <strong>na</strong><br />
akawahadharisha <strong>na</strong> adhabu <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu kama wakiendelea, lakini<br />
walizidi kiburi <strong>na</strong> i<strong>na</strong>di. Wakafan<strong>ya</strong> masikhara <strong>ya</strong> kuharakisha adhabu.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) akawaambia, ngojeni mtao<strong>na</strong> ukweli wa Mtume<br />
wangu katika <strong>ya</strong>le aliyowapa kiaga <strong>na</strong> akawahadharisha kuwa msiaharakie<br />
jambo ambalo litakuwa. Mara ngapi a<strong>na</strong>yeharakia jambo likimfikia a<strong>na</strong>tamani,<br />
lau lisingekuwa.<br />
Wafasiri wamesema, wakifafanua A<strong>ya</strong> hii, kuwa mtu a<strong>na</strong> maumbile <strong>ya</strong><br />
kutaka haraka haraka, <strong>na</strong> kwamba hiyo iko katika mishipa <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> n<strong>ya</strong>ma<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke. Lakini kama ingelikuwa sawa hivyo, basi kusingepatika<strong>na</strong> utulivu<br />
wowote; bali kila mtu angelikuwa <strong>na</strong> haraka haraka katika kauli zake <strong>na</strong><br />
vitendo v<strong>ya</strong>ke vyote, bila <strong>ya</strong> kubakia.<br />
Ikiwa utamsifia mtu kwa haraka, kufuru au kukata tamaa n.k. utakuwa<br />
u<strong>na</strong>fasiri silika <strong>ya</strong>ke katika baadhi <strong>ya</strong> hali zake, lakini sio kuwa ndio<br />
maumbile <strong>ya</strong>ke yote. Tume<strong>ya</strong>fafanua hayo kwa urefu, katika Juz. 12 (11:9)<br />
<strong>na</strong> Juz. 13 (14: 34).<br />
Na wa<strong>na</strong>sema: “Ahadi hii itatokea lini, ikiwa nyinyi m<strong>na</strong>sema kweli?<br />
Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 8 ( 7:70), Juz. 9 (7:107) <strong>na</strong> Juz. 12<br />
(11: 32).<br />
Lau wangelijua wale ambao wamekufuru wakati ambao hawatauzuia<br />
moto <strong>na</strong> nyuso zao wala migongo <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong> wala hawatanusuriwa.<br />
2 Waswahili <strong>na</strong>o wa<strong>na</strong> misemo: ‘Haraka haraka hai<strong>na</strong> baraka’ -Mtarjumu<br />
28
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Makafiri wa<strong>na</strong>harakia adhabu <strong>na</strong> wao ni wadhaifu <strong>na</strong> wako duni kuweza<br />
kuizuia au kuweza kuikimbia. Watawezaje, <strong>na</strong>yo itawagubika kutoka juu<br />
<strong>ya</strong>o hadi chini <strong>na</strong> mbele <strong>ya</strong>o hadi nyuma?<br />
Bali kitawafikia ghafla, <strong>na</strong> kitawashtua <strong>na</strong> wala hawataweza kukirudisha<br />
wala hawatapewa muda.<br />
Kitakachowafikia ghafla ni Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma. Haku<strong>na</strong> shaka kuwa kitawajia ghafla<br />
bila <strong>ya</strong> onyo lolote. Hiyo i<strong>na</strong>toka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
Mtukufu:<br />
“Wa<strong>na</strong>kuuliza kuhusu saa (<strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma). Sema hakika elimu <strong>ya</strong>ke iko kwa<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu tu.” (33: 63).<br />
Ikiwa kitakuja kwa hali hii basi ni lazima kilete mshtuko <strong>na</strong> mashangao.<br />
Kwa hiyo hawataweza kukizuia wala hakitawapa muda wa kupanga<br />
mambo <strong>ya</strong>o.<br />
Na hakika walifanyiwa stihzai Mitume kabla <strong>ya</strong>ko, kwa hiyo <strong>ya</strong><br />
kawazinga wale waliofan<strong>ya</strong> miongoni mwao <strong>ya</strong>le waliyokuwa<br />
waki<strong>ya</strong>fanyia sthizai.<br />
Imetangulia A<strong>ya</strong> hii katika Juz. 7 (6:10).<br />
Sema, ni <strong>na</strong>ni atakayewalinda usiku <strong>na</strong> mcha<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> Mwingi wa rehema.<br />
Kadiri mtu atakavyochukua hadhari <strong>na</strong> kujificha hawezi kujilinda <strong>na</strong><br />
mambo <strong>ya</strong> ghafla, isipokuwa kwa msaada wa Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> tawfiki<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke. A<strong>na</strong>wezaje kujilinda mtu <strong>na</strong> uwezo wa Mungu?<br />
Bali wao wa<strong>na</strong>puuza kumkumbuka Mola wao.<br />
29
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Waliwafanyia sthizai Mitume wa Mwenyezi Mungu, wakajiaminisha <strong>na</strong><br />
adhabu <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> wakapuuza dhikri <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu;<br />
kwa nini? Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu wako kwenye starehe, wakiio<strong>na</strong> kuwa hiyo ni<br />
ngome <strong>ya</strong> kujihifadhi.<br />
Au wao wa<strong>na</strong> miungu watakaoweza kuwakinga <strong>na</strong>si, kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
adhabu yetu tukitaka kuwaangamiza <strong>na</strong> kuwang’oa?<br />
Hao hawawezi kujinusuru wala hawatahifadhiwa <strong>na</strong>si.<br />
Hao ni hao miungu wao. Kwa maa<strong>na</strong> kwamba washiriki<strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>taka hifadhi<br />
kwa masa<strong>na</strong>mu, wakati hayo yenyewe ha<strong>ya</strong>wezi kujisaidia, ha<strong>ya</strong>wezi<br />
kujinufaisha <strong>na</strong> chochote, <strong>ya</strong>tawezaje kumsaidia mwingine?<br />
Katika Tafsirut-tabari imeelezwa kuwa watu wa taawili wametofautia<strong>na</strong><br />
katika neno yusbihun. Baada <strong>ya</strong> kunukuu kauli kadhaa, alichagua maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong><br />
kuhifadhiwa. Maa<strong>na</strong> ha<strong>ya</strong> ndiyo <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>yoafikia<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu katika (23:88).<br />
Bali tuliwastarehesha hawa <strong>na</strong> baba zao mpaka umri ukawa mrefu.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu amewapa muda <strong>na</strong> maisha wakaghurika <strong>na</strong> muda<br />
wakawa wajeuri <strong>na</strong> waba<strong>ya</strong>; hawajui kwamba Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong>wangoja<br />
<strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>wavuta polepole bila <strong>ya</strong> kujijua.<br />
Je, hawaoni kuwa tu<strong>na</strong>ifikia ardhi tukiipunguza ncha zake. Basi je,<br />
hao ni wenye kushinda?<br />
Imetangulia pamoja <strong>na</strong> tafsiri <strong>ya</strong>ke katika Juz. 13: (13:41).<br />
30
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
45. Sema: Hakika mimi<br />
ni<strong>na</strong>waon<strong>ya</strong> kwa wahyi tu. Na<br />
viziwi hawasikii mwito<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>poonywa.<br />
46. Na watakapoguswa <strong>na</strong> mpulizo<br />
mmoja wa adhabu itokayo<br />
kwa Mola wako, bila shaka<br />
watasema: Ole wetu! Hakika<br />
tulikuwa ni wenye kudhulumu.<br />
47. Na tutaweka mizani <strong>ya</strong> uadilifu<br />
kwa siku <strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma. Basi<br />
<strong>na</strong>fsi yoyote haitadhulumiwa<br />
kitu. Hata ikiwa ni chembe <strong>ya</strong><br />
khardali tutaileta. Nasi<br />
tu<strong>na</strong>tosha kuwa wenye kuhisabu.<br />
48. Na hakika tulimpa Musa <strong>na</strong><br />
Harun, upambanuzi,<br />
mwangaza <strong>na</strong> ukumbusho<br />
kwa wenye takua.<br />
31
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
49. Ambao humwogopa Mola<br />
wao faraghani <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>iogopa<br />
saa (<strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma).<br />
50. Na huu ni ukumbusho uliobarikiwa<br />
ulioteremshwa. Basi<br />
je, m<strong>na</strong>ukataa?<br />
NAWAONYA KWA WAHYI<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 45 – 50<br />
MAANA<br />
Sema: Hakika mimi ni<strong>na</strong>waon<strong>ya</strong> kwa wahyi tu. Na viziwi hawasikii<br />
mwito wa<strong>na</strong>poonywa.<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> hii ni mfano wa kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu:<br />
“Na, sema: Hakika mimi ni muon<strong>ya</strong>ji niliye dhahiri.” Juz. 14 (15: 89).<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong>mwamrisha Mtume wake mtukufu awaambie<br />
washiriki<strong>na</strong> kuwa m<strong>na</strong>kifanyia masikhara Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma <strong>na</strong> vituko v<strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong><br />
habari hiyo ni wahyi wa Mwenyezi Mungu sio mawazo au njozi. Mimi<br />
<strong>na</strong>wahadharisha kwa amri <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu sio kwa amri <strong>ya</strong>ngu.<br />
Lakini mtawezaji kusikia hadhari <strong>na</strong> maonyo <strong>na</strong> kwenye masiko yenu ku<strong>na</strong><br />
uziwi. Kila asiyeitikia <strong>na</strong>saha za Mwenyezi Mungu basi huyo ni kipofu <strong>na</strong><br />
kizizwi, hata kama a<strong>na</strong> macho <strong>na</strong> masikio.<br />
32
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Na watakapoguswa <strong>na</strong> mpulizo mmoja wa adhabu itokayo kwa Mola<br />
wako, bila shaka watasema: “Ole wetu! Hakika tulikuwa ni wenye<br />
kudhulumu.<br />
Hapo mwanzo walikuwa wa<strong>na</strong>poonywa kwa adhabu, wakifan<strong>ya</strong> masikhara<br />
<strong>na</strong> mizaha, lakini itakapowagusa kidogo tu wataanza kulalamika <strong>na</strong> kunyenyekea<br />
huku wakisema: ‘Ole wetu sisi tulikuwa madhalimu.’<br />
Umetangulia mfano wake katika sura hii A<strong>ya</strong> 14.<br />
MIZANI SIKU YA KIYAMA<br />
Na tutaweka mizani <strong>ya</strong> uadilifu kwa siku <strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma. Basi <strong>na</strong>fsi yoyote<br />
haitadhulumiwa kitu. Hata ikiwa ni chembe <strong>ya</strong> khardali tutaileta. Nasi<br />
tu<strong>na</strong>tosha kuwa wenye kuhisabu.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> mizani hapa ni hukumu <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> sharia<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke. Maa<strong>na</strong> ni kuwa Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) a<strong>na</strong>pima matendo <strong>ya</strong> waja<br />
kwa amri zake <strong>na</strong> makatazo <strong>ya</strong>ke. Ambaye atafan<strong>ya</strong> matendo <strong>ya</strong>ke kulinga<br />
<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> amri <strong>na</strong> makatazo <strong>ya</strong>ke, basi ni katika ambao mizani zao zitakuwa<br />
nzito.<br />
Imam Jafar As-Sadiq (a.s.) aliulizwa kuhusu mizani za uadilifu, akasema<br />
ni ma<strong>na</strong>bii wa Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> mawalii wake; <strong>ya</strong>ani hukumu za<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu zi<strong>na</strong>zofikishwa <strong>na</strong> mitume <strong>na</strong> mawalii katika waja<br />
wake.<br />
Malipo <strong>ya</strong>takuwa kulinga<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> misingi hii; hazitapunguzwa thawabu za<br />
mwema hata chembe, pengine i<strong>na</strong>wezeka<strong>na</strong> kuzidishwa. Wala haitazidishwa<br />
adhabu <strong>ya</strong> muovu hata chembe, pengine i<strong>na</strong>wezeka<strong>na</strong> kupunguzwa.<br />
Nasi tu<strong>na</strong>tosha kuwa wenye kuhisabu, hatutaziki wala hakitupiti kitu<br />
kadiri idadi <strong>ya</strong>ke itakavyokuwa.<br />
33
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Mulla Sadra katika Kitabu <strong>Al</strong>-asfar a<strong>na</strong>sema: “Uwezo wa Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu u<strong>na</strong>fichua matendo yote <strong>ya</strong> waja wake <strong>na</strong> kipimo cha mema <strong>ya</strong>o,<br />
maovu <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong> thawabu zake <strong>na</strong> adhabu <strong>ya</strong>ke katika kitambo kidogo, <strong>na</strong>ye<br />
ni mwepesi wa kuhisabu”<br />
Kama ataizingatia A<strong>ya</strong> hii, mwenye kujaribu kuifuatishia Qur’an <strong>na</strong> sa<strong>ya</strong>nsi,<br />
atasema kianzio cha fikra <strong>ya</strong> akili <strong>ya</strong> mashine ni Qur’an. Angalia kifungu<br />
cha ‘Qur’an <strong>na</strong> sa<strong>ya</strong>nsi’ katika mwanzo wa <strong>Juzuu</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kwanza.<br />
Mwenye <strong>Al</strong>-Asfar amezungumzia kwa urefu kuhusu mizani <strong>ya</strong> siku <strong>ya</strong><br />
Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma. Kwa kuangalia uwezo wa mtungaji katika falsafa <strong>ya</strong> itikadi n.k.<br />
Tutachukukua baadhi <strong>ya</strong> ibara zake, kama ifuatavyo, pamoja <strong>na</strong> nyongeza<br />
kidogo kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> ufafanuzi:<br />
“Mizani <strong>ya</strong> Akhera ni ile ambayo hujulika<strong>na</strong> kwayo usahihi wa elimu,<br />
imani <strong>ya</strong> Mungu, sifa zake, vitendo v<strong>ya</strong>ke, malaika wake, mitume wake,<br />
vitabu v<strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> siku <strong>ya</strong> mwisho. Mizani hii ni Qur’an ambayo ameiteremsha<br />
mwalimu wa kwanza, ambaye ni Mwenyezi Mungu, kwa mwalimu<br />
wa tatu, ambaye ni Mtume, kupita kwa mwalimu wa pili ambaye ni<br />
Jibril.<br />
Kwa hukumu <strong>ya</strong> Qur’an ndio hupimwa elimu <strong>ya</strong> mtu, akili <strong>ya</strong>ke, kauli <strong>na</strong><br />
vitendo v<strong>ya</strong>ke vyote. Vile vile hujulika<strong>na</strong> mema <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> maovu <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Ikiwa wema utazidi basi mwenyewe atakuwa ni katika wema <strong>na</strong> ikiwa<br />
uovu utazidi basi atakuwa katika waovu. Ikiwa mema <strong>na</strong> maovu <strong>ya</strong>talinga<strong>na</strong>,<br />
basi mwenyewe atangojea mpaka Mungu amuhu<strong>kumi</strong>e adhabu au<br />
msamaha, lakini upande wa hurumma ndio ulio <strong>na</strong> nguvu zaidi. Kwa<br />
<strong>saba</strong>bu Mwenyezi Mungu ni mwingi wa maghufira Mwenye kurehemu”<br />
Kisha akasema - mweneye <strong>Al</strong>-asfar – mahali pengine: “Kila kitu ki<strong>na</strong><br />
mizani isipokuwa neno: “Lailaha illa-llah, (Hapa<strong>na</strong> Mola isipokuwa<br />
<strong>Al</strong>lah) kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu neno hilo la tawhid hali<strong>na</strong> mkabala <strong>na</strong> jambo lolote<br />
isipokuwa shirk, <strong>na</strong> shirki hai<strong>na</strong> mizani.”<br />
34
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Akaendelea kusema te<strong>na</strong> mahali pengine: “Hakika Qur’an ni kama meza<br />
yenye ai<strong>na</strong> kwa ai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> v<strong>ya</strong>kula, kuanzia v<strong>ya</strong>kula halisi hadi maganda. Kile<br />
halisi ni hekima <strong>na</strong> dalili <strong>na</strong> ki<strong>na</strong>husika <strong>na</strong> wenye busara. Ama maganda ni<br />
<strong>ya</strong> walio mbumbumbu ambao ni kama wan<strong>ya</strong>ma; kama alivyosema<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu:<br />
“Kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> manufaa yenu <strong>na</strong> wan<strong>ya</strong>ma wenu.” (80:32).<br />
Kwa haraka haraka mtu a<strong>na</strong>weza akadhani kuwa ibara <strong>ya</strong> maganda ni<br />
kukikosea adabu Kitabu cha Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> utukufu wake, lakini<br />
mwenye Asfar yuko zaidi <strong>ya</strong> dha<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> shakashaka. Mwenye ku<strong>ya</strong>chunguza<br />
<strong>na</strong> ku<strong>ya</strong>taamali maneno <strong>ya</strong>ke atajua kuwa makusudio <strong>ya</strong> maganda ni watu<br />
wa hayo maganda, kama wale wa<strong>na</strong>oganda kwenye dhahiri <strong>ya</strong> maneno bila<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kuangalia undani wake, hawaoni mbali zaidi <strong>ya</strong> pua zao, kwa dalili <strong>ya</strong><br />
<strong>ya</strong>le aliyo<strong>ya</strong>eleza alipokuwa akifafanua Hadith <strong>ya</strong> Mtume isemayo:<br />
“Qur’an i<strong>na</strong> dhahiri <strong>na</strong> batini.”<br />
Hadith hii ameifafanua kwa maneno marefu; miongoni mwa maneno hayo<br />
ni ha<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong>futayo: “Hakika Qur’an i<strong>na</strong> daraja kama vile watu ambao wako<br />
wenye akili <strong>na</strong> wasiokuwa <strong>na</strong> akili. Asiye <strong>na</strong> akili ni kama yule<br />
a<strong>na</strong>yechukua mambo kijujuu. Ama roho <strong>ya</strong> Qur’an <strong>na</strong> siri <strong>ya</strong>ke haigundui<br />
isipokuwa mwenye akili <strong>na</strong> busara. Kwa hiyo mgawanyiko u<strong>na</strong>kuja<br />
kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>vyoifahamu Qur’an sio Qur’an yenyewe.<br />
Na hakika tulimpa Musa <strong>na</strong> Harun, upambanuzi, mwangaza <strong>na</strong><br />
ukumbusho kwa wenye takua.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> upambanuzi hapa ni Tawrat, kama alivyoiteremsha<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu kwa Musa. Kila Kitabu cha mbinguni ni upambanuzi,<br />
kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu ki<strong>na</strong>pambanua uongofu <strong>na</strong> upotevu, ni mwangaza wa kuondoa<br />
giza la ujinga <strong>na</strong> ukafiri <strong>na</strong> ukumbusho kwa mwenye kuitafuta takua, kwa<br />
35
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
<strong>saba</strong>bu ki<strong>na</strong> mkumbusha kuhusu Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> kumbainishia halali<br />
<strong>na</strong> haramu.<br />
Ambao humwogopa Mola wao faraghani <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>iogopa saa (<strong>ya</strong><br />
Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma).<br />
Ha<strong>ya</strong> ndiyo maelezo <strong>ya</strong> wenye takua, kwamba wao wa<strong>na</strong>mcha Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu kwa siri kusiko <strong>na</strong> watu; sawa <strong>na</strong> vile wa<strong>na</strong>vyomcha dhahiri. Kwa<br />
vile wa<strong>na</strong> imani siku <strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma, hisabu <strong>na</strong> malipo, huku wakiiogopa siku<br />
hiyo <strong>na</strong> kuifanyia kazi.<br />
Na huu ni ukumbusho uliobarikiwa ulioteremshwa.<br />
Ni ukumbusho kwa mwenye kutaka kukumbuka, ni mawaidha kwa<br />
mwenye kuwaidhika <strong>na</strong> ni kheri kwa mwenye kuamrika <strong>na</strong> maarisho <strong>ya</strong>ke<br />
<strong>na</strong> kukatatiza kwa makatazo <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Basi je, m<strong>na</strong>ukataa? Na hali hoja <strong>na</strong> dalili zake ziko wazi.<br />
51. Na hakika tulikwisha mpa<br />
Ibrahim uongofu wake<br />
zamani<br />
tu<strong>na</strong>mjua.<br />
<strong>na</strong> tulikuwa<br />
52. <strong>Al</strong>ipomwambia baba <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong><br />
watu wake: Ni nini ha<strong>ya</strong><br />
masa<strong>na</strong>mu m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>nga’ng’ania?<br />
36
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
53. Wakasema: Tumewakuta<br />
baba zetu waki<strong>ya</strong>abudu.<br />
54. Akasema: Hakika nyinyi <strong>na</strong><br />
baba zenu mmekuwa kwenye<br />
upotofu ulio dhahiri.<br />
55. Wakasema: Je, umetujia kwa<br />
haki au wewe ni katika<br />
wafan<strong>ya</strong>o mchezo?<br />
56. Akasema: Bali Mola wenu ni<br />
Mola wa mbingu <strong>na</strong> ardhi<br />
ambaye ndiye aliyeziumba,<br />
<strong>na</strong> mimi ni katika wenye<br />
ku<strong>ya</strong>shuhudia hayo.<br />
57. Naapa kwa Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu! Nita<strong>ya</strong>fanyia vitimbi<br />
masa<strong>na</strong>mu yenu baada <strong>ya</strong><br />
kunipa mgogo.<br />
58. Basi aka<strong>ya</strong>vunja vipande<br />
vipande isipokuwa kubwa lao<br />
ili wao walirudie.<br />
37
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
59. Wakasema: Ni <strong>na</strong>ni<br />
aliye<strong>ya</strong>fanyia ha<strong>ya</strong> miungu<br />
wetu? Hakika huyu ni katika<br />
madhalimu.<br />
60. Wakasema: Tumemsikia<br />
kija<strong>na</strong> mmoja akiwataja.<br />
A<strong>na</strong>itwa Ibrahim.<br />
IBRAHIM<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 51 -60<br />
MAANA<br />
Na hakika tulikwisha mpa Ibrahim uongofu wake zamani <strong>na</strong> tulikuwa<br />
tu<strong>na</strong>mjua.<br />
Wametofautia<strong>na</strong> wafasiri kuhusu maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> uongofu. Ikasemeka<strong>na</strong> kuwa ni<br />
kuongoka kwenye utengenefu wa dini <strong>na</strong> dunia. Pia ikasemeka<strong>na</strong> kuwa ni<br />
utume. Kauli hii ndiyo yenye nguvu zaidi kwa dalili <strong>ya</strong> kauli ‘zamani’<br />
maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ke ni kabla <strong>ya</strong> mitume waliokuja baada <strong>ya</strong> Ibrahim (a.s.); kama<br />
vile Musa (a.s.), Isa (a.s.) <strong>na</strong> Muhammad (s.a.w.). Pia kwa dalili <strong>ya</strong> kauli<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu ‘Na tulikuwa tu<strong>na</strong>mjua’ ambayo maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ke ni<br />
kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke:<br />
“Mwenyezi Mungu diye Mjuzi zaidi wa kujua mahali a<strong>na</strong>poweka ujumbe<br />
wake.” Juz. (6:124).<br />
38
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Utume u<strong>na</strong>toka kwa Mungu, a<strong>na</strong>muhusisha <strong>na</strong>o mwenye kuustahiki, wala<br />
haupatika<strong>na</strong>i kwa bidii <strong>ya</strong> mtu; kama vile imani <strong>na</strong> takua. Ndio maa<strong>na</strong><br />
husemwa kuwa mumin, kuwa mcha Mungu, lakini haisemwi kuwa Mtume.<br />
<strong>Al</strong>ipomwambia baba <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> watu wake: Ni nini ha<strong>ya</strong> masa<strong>na</strong>mu<br />
m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>nga’ng’ania?<br />
Swali hili li<strong>na</strong>elekezwa kwa kila mwenye majukumu <strong>ya</strong> matendo <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong><br />
matumizi <strong>ya</strong>ke. Vipi m<strong>na</strong>vitukuza <strong>na</strong> kuviabudu visivyodhuru wala kunufaisha;<br />
<strong>na</strong> nyinyi m<strong>na</strong> akili <strong>na</strong> utambuzi?<br />
Wakasema: Tumewakuta baba zetu waki<strong>ya</strong>abudu.<br />
Mantiki hii a<strong>na</strong>ikimbilia kila mwenye kushindwa <strong>na</strong> hoja <strong>na</strong> dalili.<br />
Ukimuuliza kwa nini umefan<strong>ya</strong> hivi, atasema: Fulani amefan<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Haku<strong>na</strong> la kuwaambia watu wa ai<strong>na</strong> hii, isipokuwa kauli <strong>ya</strong> Nabii Ibrahim:<br />
Akasema: Hakika nyinyi <strong>na</strong> baba zenu mmekuwa kwenye upotofu ulio<br />
dhahiri. Na upotofu hauwezi kubadilika kuwa uongofu hata ukifuatwa <strong>na</strong><br />
wengi.<br />
Wakasema: Je, umetujia kwa haki au wewe ni katika wafan<strong>ya</strong>o<br />
mchezo?<br />
Walijitia mshangao kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong> Ibrahim, kwa vile wa<strong>na</strong>wao<strong>na</strong><br />
baba zao wametakaswa <strong>na</strong> makosa; si kwa lolote ila ni kwa kuwa ni baba<br />
zao tu.<br />
Mantiki ha<strong>ya</strong> hawahusiki <strong>na</strong>o kaumu <strong>ya</strong> Ibrahim tu, wala washiriki<strong>na</strong><br />
wengine; bali kila mwenye kuigiza wengine kwa upofu, yuko sawa <strong>na</strong><br />
waabudu masa<strong>na</strong>mu.<br />
39
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Akasema: Bali Mola wenu ni Mola wa mbingu <strong>na</strong> ardhi ambaye ndiye<br />
aliyeziumba,<br />
Mimi sifanyi mchezo wala sitii shaka. Vipi nifanye mchezo <strong>na</strong> kutia<br />
shakashaka <strong>na</strong> hali Yeye ndiye muumba wa mbingu <strong>na</strong> ardhi <strong>na</strong> mimi ni<br />
katika wenye ku<strong>ya</strong>shuhudia hayo?<br />
Naapa kwa Mwenyezi Mungu! Nita<strong>ya</strong>fanyia vitimbi masa<strong>na</strong>mu yenu<br />
baada <strong>ya</strong> kunipa mgogo.<br />
Ilivyo ni kwamba masa<strong>na</strong>mu ha<strong>ya</strong>wezi kufanyiwa vitimbi, kwa <strong>saba</strong>u<br />
ha<strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong> hisia; isipokuwa wa<strong>na</strong>ofanyiwa vitimbi ni waabudu masa<strong>na</strong>mu,<br />
kwa hiyo ku<strong>ya</strong>fanyia vitimbi ni majazi, sio hakika; isipokuwa <strong>ya</strong>mefanywa<br />
ni nyenzo <strong>ya</strong> kufanyiwa vitimbi wa<strong>na</strong>o<strong>ya</strong>abudu.<br />
Basi aka<strong>ya</strong>vunja vipande vipande isipokuwa kubwa lao ili wao<br />
walirudie.<br />
Ibrahim ali<strong>ya</strong>vunja masa<strong>na</strong>mu yote <strong>na</strong> akaliacha lile kubwa lao, ili wale<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>o<strong>ya</strong>abudu waliulize, kwa nini halikuweza kuwatetea wenzake wadogo<br />
<strong>na</strong>lo li<strong>na</strong> nguvu? Makusudio <strong>ya</strong>ko wazi; <strong>na</strong>yo ni kuwa washiriki<strong>na</strong><br />
wazingatie kuwa masa<strong>na</strong>mu ha<strong>ya</strong> ikiwa hayo yenyewe ha<strong>ya</strong>wezi kujitetea,<br />
basi ndio ha<strong>ya</strong>wezi kumtetea mwengine.<br />
Wakasema: Ni <strong>na</strong>ni aliye<strong>ya</strong>fanyia ha<strong>ya</strong> miungu wetu? Hakika huyu ni<br />
katika madhalimu.<br />
Usawa ni kuwa waulize miungu <strong>ya</strong>o imemfanyia nini aliye<strong>ya</strong>vunja? Lakini<br />
ha<strong>ya</strong> ndiyo mantiki <strong>ya</strong> kijinga <strong>na</strong> kuiga.<br />
Wakasema: Tumemsikia kija<strong>na</strong> mmoja akiwataja. A<strong>na</strong>itwa Ibrahim.<br />
Hii i<strong>na</strong>ashiria kauli <strong>ya</strong> Ibrahim (a.s.): “Nita<strong>ya</strong>fanyia vitimbi masa<strong>na</strong>mu<br />
yenu.”<br />
40
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> kuandika <strong>Juzuu</strong> <strong>ya</strong> sita, nilisoma kwenye mojawapo <strong>ya</strong> magazeti,<br />
kwamba wafukuaji, wamegundua mji wa kwanza wa Ibrahim, Uru.<br />
Ikabainika kwamba watu wake walikuwa wakiabudu nyota tatu: ndogo,<br />
wastani <strong>na</strong> kubwa.<br />
Kwa hiyo mpangilio huu uliokuja katika Qur’an kupitia ulimi wa Ibrahim<br />
ndio mpangilio wa kimantiki ambao u<strong>na</strong>fuata<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> maisha <strong>ya</strong> wakati huo.<br />
Hivi ndivyo elimu i<strong>na</strong>vyoleta dalili kila siku juu <strong>ya</strong> ukweli wa Muhammad<br />
(s.a.w.) katika kila aliyo<strong>ya</strong>eleza.<br />
61. Wakasema: Mleteni mbele <strong>ya</strong><br />
macho <strong>ya</strong> watu, wapate<br />
kumshuhudia.<br />
62. Wakasema: Je, wewe ndiwe<br />
uliyeifanyia ha<strong>ya</strong> mingu yetu<br />
ewe Ibrahim?<br />
63. Akasema: Bali ame<strong>ya</strong>fan<strong>ya</strong><br />
hayo mkubwa wao huyu. Basi<br />
waulizeni ikiwa wa<strong>na</strong>tamka.<br />
64. Basi wakajirudi <strong>na</strong>fsi zao.<br />
Wakasema: Hakika nyinyi<br />
ndio madhalimu.<br />
41
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
65. Kisha wakasimamia vichwa<br />
v<strong>ya</strong>o. Wewe u<strong>na</strong>jua kwamba<br />
hawa hawasemi.<br />
66. Akasema: Basi nyinyi<br />
m<strong>na</strong>abudu badala <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu visivyo<br />
wanufaisha kitu wala kuwadhuru?<br />
67. Kefule yenu <strong>na</strong> m<strong>na</strong>vyoviabudu<br />
badala <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu. Basi hamtii akili?<br />
68. Wakasema: Mchomeni <strong>na</strong><br />
muinusuru miungu yenu,<br />
ikiwa nyinyi ni watendao<br />
jambo.<br />
69. Tukasema: Ewe moto! Kuwa<br />
baridi<br />
Ibrahim!<br />
<strong>na</strong> salama kwa<br />
70. Na wakamtakia uba<strong>ya</strong>, lakini<br />
tukawafan<strong>ya</strong> wao ndio wenye<br />
kupata hasara.<br />
42
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
WAKASEMA: MLETENI<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 61 – 70<br />
MAANA<br />
Wakasema: Mleteni mbele <strong>ya</strong> macho <strong>ya</strong> watu, wapate kumshuhudia.<br />
Walitaka wamsaili <strong>na</strong> kumhukumu mbele <strong>ya</strong> watu wamshuhudie; kisha<br />
waone adhabu itakayompata.<br />
Wakasema: Je, wewe ndiwe uliyeifanyia ha<strong>ya</strong> mingu yetu ewe<br />
Ibrahim?<br />
Walimleta <strong>na</strong> wakaanza kumhoji. Akasema: Bali ame<strong>ya</strong>fan<strong>ya</strong> hayo<br />
mkubwa wao huyu. Basi waulizeni ikiwa wa<strong>na</strong>tamka.<br />
Kutamka ni katika hali <strong>ya</strong> kukadiria; ikiwa hawa wa<strong>na</strong> hisia basi aliyefan<strong>ya</strong><br />
ni mkubwa wao. Mfano kusema: ikiwa Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong> mtoto, basi<br />
mimi ni wa mwanzo wa wenye kumwabudu.<br />
Kwa ujumla ni kwamba makusudio ni kuwan<strong>ya</strong>mazisha kwa hoja, <strong>na</strong><br />
kwamba masa<strong>na</strong>mu ha<strong>ya</strong>, kama <strong>ya</strong>ngekuwa ni Mungu <strong>ya</strong>ngelikuwa <strong>na</strong><br />
utambuzi, kusema <strong>na</strong> kumvu<strong>na</strong>jilia mbali a<strong>na</strong>yetaka ku<strong>ya</strong>fanyia uba<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Basi wakajirudi <strong>na</strong>fsi zao.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> kusikia aliyo<strong>ya</strong>sema Ibrahim (a.s.) waliuliza<strong>na</strong>: Vipi tuabudu<br />
mawe <strong>na</strong> kutarajia kheri <strong>na</strong> kuhofia shari <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> hayo yenyewe ha<strong>ya</strong>wezi<br />
kujikinga <strong>na</strong> madhara.<br />
Wakasema: Hakika nyinyi ndio madhalimu.<br />
43
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Waliishia kukiri kuwa wao wako katika ujinga, lakini mara tu wakarudia<br />
kwenye hali <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>ya</strong> mwanzo.<br />
Kisha wakasimamia vichwa v<strong>ya</strong>o.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> kusimamia vichwa hapa ni kurudi kwenye uovu wao. Neno<br />
lililotumika ni nukisu lenye maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kuweka kichwa chini miguu juu.<br />
Yaani kumpa silaha adui <strong>ya</strong>ko akuue <strong>na</strong>yo, au kumpa hoja mtu kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
vitendo v<strong>ya</strong>ko au kauli <strong>ya</strong>ko; kama walivyofan<strong>ya</strong> kaumu <strong>ya</strong> Ibrahim, waliposema:<br />
wewe u<strong>na</strong>jua kwamba hawa hawasemi. Ikiwa hawasemi, basi<br />
vipi m<strong>na</strong>waabudu. At-Tabariy a<strong>na</strong>sema: “Kupindua jambo ni kulifan<strong>ya</strong><br />
kichwa chini miguu juu <strong>na</strong> kupindua hoja ni kuifan<strong>ya</strong> hoja <strong>ya</strong> hasimu wako<br />
ndio hoja <strong>ya</strong>ko; kama walivyofan<strong>ya</strong> kaumu <strong>ya</strong> Ibrahim.”<br />
Akasema: Basi nyinyi m<strong>na</strong>abudu badala <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu visivyo<br />
wanufaisha kitu wala kuwadhuru?<br />
Nyinyi m<strong>na</strong>jua kuwa ha<strong>ya</strong> masa<strong>na</strong>mu ha<strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong> utambuzi wala matamshi,<br />
ha<strong>ya</strong>dhuru wala ha<strong>ya</strong>nufaishi, basi vipi m<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong>abudu?<br />
Kefule yenu <strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> m<strong>na</strong>vyoviabudu badala <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu. Basi<br />
hamtii akili?<br />
Utafan<strong>ya</strong> nini <strong>na</strong> watu wa<strong>na</strong>ong’ang’ania upotevu <strong>na</strong> wao wa<strong>na</strong>jua kuwa<br />
huo ni upotevu. Haku<strong>na</strong> cha kuwafan<strong>ya</strong> isipokuwa kuwaaambia: poteleeni<br />
mbali, enyi m<strong>na</strong>ofa<strong>na</strong><strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> watu <strong>na</strong> wala sio watu.<br />
Wakasema: Mchomeni <strong>na</strong> muinusuru miungu yenu, ikiwa nyinyi ni<br />
watendao jambo.<br />
Wanusuruni miungu, lakini miungu yenyewe haiwezi kujinusuru, <strong>na</strong> bado<br />
ni miungu tu! Ni sawa <strong>na</strong> yule aliyesema: ‘Huyo ni paa hata kama ameruka<br />
angani.’ Huko ndiko kuweka kichwa chini miguu juu.<br />
44
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Tukasema: Ewe moto! Kuwa baridi <strong>na</strong> salama kwa Ibrahim!<br />
Walisema <strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong>ye akasema. Wala haku<strong>na</strong> mwenye<br />
kurudisha kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
U<strong>na</strong>weza kuuliza: Kwa kawaida moto u<strong>na</strong>unguza, vipi uwe baridi.<br />
Jibu: Mwenye kuleta athari wa kwanza kwa kila kilichpo ni Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu ambaye umetukuka ukuu wake. Yote hutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> Yeye, <strong>na</strong> kwake<br />
zi<strong>na</strong>ishia nyenzo zote, ziwe ni sharti, <strong>saba</strong>bu au chochote. Kuunguza ku<strong>na</strong>toka<strong>na</strong><br />
<strong>na</strong> moto, moto u<strong>na</strong>toka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> kuni, kuni ni maumbile <strong>ya</strong>liyotoka<strong>na</strong><br />
<strong>na</strong> neno lake.<br />
Yeye ndiye aliyeumba moto ambao u<strong>na</strong>unguza, lakini kwa sharti <strong>ya</strong><br />
kutouambia ‘kuwa baridi.’ Kwa hiyo kama atauambia hivyo utakuwa kama<br />
alivyosema. Kwa maneno mengine ni kuwa kuunguza kwake <strong>na</strong> kuwa<br />
baridi kwake ku<strong>na</strong>futa matakwa <strong>ya</strong> Mungu kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> kuumba kwake <strong>na</strong><br />
kuufan<strong>ya</strong> uweko.<br />
Na wakamtakia uba<strong>ya</strong>, lakini tukawafan<strong>ya</strong> wao ndio wenye kupata<br />
hasara.<br />
Waliwasha moto ili umchome Ibrahim, lakini ukawa ni muujiza mkubwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> dalili <strong>ya</strong> kuthibitisha ukweli wake <strong>na</strong> utume wake:<br />
“Na wakapanga hila; <strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu akapanga hila; <strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu ndiye mbora wa kupanga hila” Juz. 3 (3:54).<br />
Katika baadhi <strong>ya</strong> tafsiri za zamani, imeelezwa kuwa Namrud alipoo<strong>na</strong><br />
moto haumuathiri Ibrahim, aliamuru mali zake zichukuliwe <strong>na</strong> yeye<br />
45
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
mwenyewe atolewe nchini.<br />
Ibrahim akasema: Mkichukua mali zangu basi nirudishieni umri wangu<br />
nilioumaliza kwenye nchi yenu.<br />
Wakaenda mahakamani, hakimu akatoa hukumu <strong>ya</strong> kun<strong>ya</strong>ng’an<strong>ya</strong>wa mali<br />
Ibrahim <strong>na</strong> Namrud amrudishie umri wake. Hapo akasalimu amri <strong>na</strong><br />
akamwacha Ibrahim <strong>na</strong> mali zake.<br />
Heka<strong>ya</strong> hii hatukuinukuu kwa kuamini kuwa ni kwali hivyo; isipokuwa<br />
i<strong>na</strong>onyesha kuwa kila mtu a<strong>na</strong> haki <strong>ya</strong> umri wake alioumaliza kwa sharti<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kuwa ameutumia kwenye halali.<br />
71. Na tukamwokoa yeye <strong>na</strong> Lut<br />
tukawapeleka kwenye ardhi<br />
tuliyoibariki, kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> walimwengu<br />
wote.<br />
72. Naye tukampa Is-haq <strong>na</strong><br />
Yakub kuwa ni zawadi. Na<br />
wote tukawajaalia wawe watu<br />
wema.<br />
73. Na tukawafan<strong>ya</strong> maimamu<br />
wakiongoza kwa amri yetu.<br />
Na tukawapa wahyi watende<br />
kheri <strong>na</strong> wasimamishe Swala<br />
<strong>na</strong> watoe Zaka <strong>na</strong> walikuwa<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>tuabudu sisi.<br />
46
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
74. Na Lut tukampa hukumu <strong>na</strong><br />
elimu <strong>na</strong> tukamwokoa <strong>na</strong> ule<br />
mji uliokuwa ukifan<strong>ya</strong><br />
maovu. Hakika hao walikuwa<br />
waba<strong>ya</strong>, mafasiki.<br />
75. Na tukamwingiza katika<br />
rehema zetu. Hakika yeye ni<br />
miongoni mwa walio wema.<br />
76. Na Nuh alipoita zamani, <strong>na</strong>si<br />
tukamwitikia <strong>na</strong> tukamwokoa<br />
yeye <strong>na</strong> watu wake<br />
kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> shida kubwa.<br />
77. Na tukamnusuru <strong>na</strong> watu<br />
waliozikadhibisha Ishara<br />
zetu. Hakika hao walikuwa<br />
watu waba<strong>ya</strong>. Basi<br />
tukawagharikisha wote.<br />
47
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
TUKAMWOKOA YEYE NA LUT<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 71 – 77<br />
MAANA<br />
Na tukamwokoa yeye <strong>na</strong> Lut tukawapeleka kwenye ardhi tuliyoibariki,<br />
kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> walimwengu wote.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> aliyeokolewa hapa ni Ibrahim (a.s.). Lut ni mtoto wa kaka<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke. Katika Tafsiri imelezwa kuwa Ibrahim aliondoka akaelekea nchi <strong>ya</strong><br />
Sham, ambayo ndani ilikuwako Palesti<strong>na</strong>.<br />
Vyovyote iwavyo ni kwamba makusudio ni kumfa<strong>na</strong>nisha Muhammad<br />
(s.a.w.) <strong>na</strong> kaumu <strong>ya</strong>ke pamoja <strong>na</strong> Ibrahim (a.s.) <strong>na</strong> kaumu <strong>ya</strong>ke. Kaumu<br />
zote mbili ziliabudu masa<strong>na</strong>mu, zikakataa mwito wa <strong>na</strong>bii wao <strong>na</strong> kujaribu<br />
kumuua. Ma<strong>na</strong>bii wote wawili Mungu aliwaokoa <strong>na</strong> kuwatengenezea njia<br />
<strong>ya</strong> hijra <strong>na</strong> kuwaneemesha kwa hijra hiyo.<br />
Naye tukampa Is-haq <strong>na</strong> Yakub kuwa ni zawadi.<br />
Is-haq ni mtoto wa Ibrahim wa kumzaa, <strong>na</strong> Yakub ni mjukuu <strong>na</strong>ye ni zawadi<br />
kutoka kwa Mwenyezi Mungu.<br />
Na wote tukawajaalia wawe watu wema.<br />
Ibrahim, Is-haq , wote walikuwa wema.<br />
Na tukawafan<strong>ya</strong> maimamu wakiongoza kwa amri yetu. Na tukawapa<br />
wahyi watende kheri <strong>na</strong> wasimamishe Swala <strong>na</strong> watoe Zaka <strong>na</strong><br />
walikuwa wa<strong>na</strong>tuabudu sisi.<br />
Maimamu ndio viongozi wa dini ambao amewateua Mwenyezi Mungu,<br />
kuwaongoza waja. Sifa <strong>ya</strong>o kuu ni kwamba wao wa<strong>na</strong>ongoza watu kama<br />
alivyoamrisha Mungu, si kama wa<strong>na</strong>vyoamrisha wake zao, watoto wao au<br />
wakwe zao; wa<strong>na</strong>himiza kufan<strong>ya</strong> kheri sio chuki za utaifa; <strong>na</strong> kumfanyia<br />
48
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
ikhlasi Mwenyezi Mungu peke <strong>ya</strong>ke sio mwenginewe.<br />
Na Lut tukampa hukumu <strong>na</strong> elimu <strong>na</strong> tukamwokoa <strong>na</strong> ule mji<br />
uliokuwa ukifan<strong>ya</strong> maovu. Hakika hao walikuwa waba<strong>ya</strong>, mafasiki.<br />
Na tukamwingiza katika rehema zetu. Hakika yeye ni miongoni mwa<br />
walio wema.<br />
Tazama tafsiri <strong>ya</strong>ke katika Juz. 8 (7: 80) <strong>na</strong> Juz 12 (11:77).<br />
Na Nuh alipoita zamani, <strong>na</strong>si tukamwitikia <strong>na</strong> tukamwokoa yeye <strong>na</strong><br />
watu wake kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> shida kubwa. Na tukamnusuru <strong>na</strong> watu<br />
waliozikadhibisha Ishara zetu. Hakika hao walikuwa watu waba<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Basi tukawagharikisha wote.<br />
Kisa cha Nuh kimetangulia katika Juz. 12 (11:25).<br />
78. Na Daud <strong>na</strong> Suleiman walipohukumu<br />
juu <strong>ya</strong> shamba,<br />
walipolisha humo mbuzi wa<br />
watu usiku. Na sisi tulikuwa<br />
wenye kushuhudia hukumu<br />
<strong>ya</strong>o.<br />
79. Tukamfahamisha Suleiman<br />
<strong>na</strong> kila mmoja wao tukampa<br />
hukumu <strong>na</strong> elimu. Na tuliifan<strong>ya</strong><br />
milima <strong>na</strong> ndege kuwa<br />
pamoja <strong>na</strong> Daud imnyenyekee<br />
<strong>na</strong> imsabihi (Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu). Na sisi tulikuwa ni<br />
wenye kuifan<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
49
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
80. Na tukamfundisha kutengeneza<br />
mavazi <strong>ya</strong> vita ili<br />
kuwakinga katika mapigano<br />
yenu. Je, mtakuwa wenye<br />
kushukuru?<br />
81. Na upepo mkali kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong><br />
Suleiman, wendao kwa amri<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke, katika ardhi tuliyoibariki.<br />
Na sisi ndio tu<strong>na</strong>ojua<br />
kila kitu.<br />
82. Na katika mashetani ku<strong>na</strong><br />
wanompigia mbizi <strong>na</strong><br />
kufan<strong>ya</strong> kazi nyinginezo;<br />
Nasi tulikuwa walinzi wao.<br />
DAUD NA SULEIMAN<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 78 – 82<br />
MAANA<br />
Na Daud <strong>na</strong> Suleiman walipohukumu juu <strong>ya</strong> shamba, walipolisha<br />
humo mbuzi wa watu usiku. Na sisi tulikuwa wenye kushuhudia<br />
hukumu <strong>ya</strong>o.<br />
Ku<strong>na</strong> riwa<strong>ya</strong> iliyo mashuhuri midomoni mwa wapokezi, kwamba watu<br />
50
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
wawili walikwenda kuamuliwa kwa Daud. Mmoja alikuwa <strong>na</strong> mimea <strong>na</strong><br />
wa pili alikuwa <strong>na</strong> mifugo <strong>ya</strong> mbuzi <strong>na</strong> kondoo. Mwenye shamba akasema<br />
wan<strong>ya</strong>ma wa huyu bwa<strong>na</strong> wamelisha kwenye mimea <strong>ya</strong>ngu usiku. Baada<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kumthibitikia hilo, Daud alitoa hukumu kuwa wan<strong>ya</strong>ma wawe wa<br />
mwenye shamba.<br />
Suleiman alipojua hivyo akasema, ni vizuri mwenye shamba awachukue<br />
wan<strong>ya</strong>ma, anufaike <strong>na</strong>o lakini wasiwe wake kabisa, <strong>na</strong> mwenye wan<strong>ya</strong>ma<br />
achukue ardhi aishghulikie mpaka iwe kama ilivyokuwa kabla <strong>ya</strong> kuliwa.<br />
Kisha bada <strong>ya</strong> hapo kila mmoja achukue mali <strong>ya</strong>ke. Daud akapendezewa<br />
<strong>na</strong> hukumu <strong>ya</strong> mwa<strong>na</strong>we <strong>na</strong> akaitumia.<br />
Dhahiri <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> i<strong>na</strong>afikia<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> riwa<strong>ya</strong> hii. Imethibiti kutoka kwa Mtume wa<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu (s.a.w.) kwamba yeye amesema: “Li<strong>na</strong>loafikia<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
Qur’an lichukueni <strong>na</strong> li<strong>na</strong>lokhalifia<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong>lo liacheni.”<br />
U<strong>na</strong>weza kuuliza: Kila mmoja kati <strong>ya</strong> Daud <strong>na</strong> Suleiman ni Nabii <strong>na</strong> Nabii<br />
ni maasumu; hasa katika hukumu <strong>ya</strong> sharia <strong>na</strong> hukumu <strong>ya</strong> sawa, sasa je<br />
ku<strong>na</strong> wajihi gani wa kupinga<strong>na</strong> hukumu mbili hizi?<br />
Baadhi wamejibu kuwa kauli <strong>ya</strong> Daud ilikuwa ni upatanishi sio hukumu.<br />
Lakini ijulikane kuwa upatanishi u<strong>na</strong>kuwa kwa baadhi <strong>ya</strong> mali sio yote <strong>na</strong><br />
Daud hakumbakishia mfugaji hata mn<strong>ya</strong>ma mmoja.<br />
Wengine wakasema kuwa kila mmoja kati <strong>ya</strong> ma<strong>na</strong>bii wawili hao alihukumu<br />
kwa ijitihadi <strong>ya</strong>ke. Kauli hii vile vile i<strong>na</strong> kasoro; kwamba Nabii a<strong>na</strong>tumia<br />
ijitihadi kama ulama wengine <strong>na</strong> i<strong>na</strong>julika<strong>na</strong> kuwa rai <strong>ya</strong> ijtihadi<br />
i<strong>na</strong>kuwa kwa kukoseka<strong>na</strong> nukuu (Nass) <strong>na</strong> ilivyo ni kuwa kauli <strong>ya</strong> Nabii ni<br />
nukuu <strong>ya</strong> haki; <strong>na</strong> kwamba ijitihadi i<strong>na</strong> uwezekano wa kupatia <strong>na</strong> kukosea,<br />
jambo ambalo haliswihi kwa maasumu.<br />
Jamaa wamesema kuwa hukumu ilikuwa kama alivyopitisha Daud; kisha<br />
ikabadilishwa (<strong>na</strong>skh), <strong>na</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong> Suleiman 3<br />
3 Kama ilivyo katika baadhi <strong>ya</strong> hukumu kwenye Qur’an –Mtarjumu.<br />
51
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Kauli hii i<strong>na</strong> nguvu zaidi kwa dalili <strong>ya</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
Mtukufu: Tukamfahamisha Suleiman <strong>na</strong> kila mmoja wao tukampa<br />
hukumu <strong>na</strong> elimu.<br />
Hapo Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong>shudia kuwa kila mmoja ni mjuzi wa hukumu.<br />
Kwa hiyo basi kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu ‘Tukamfahamisha Suleiman’<br />
ni kwamba yeye alimpelekea wahyi wa kubadilisha hukumu <strong>ya</strong> baba <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Mafaqihi wametofautia<strong>na</strong> kuwa je mwenye mifugo atalipa kilichoharibiwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> wan<strong>ya</strong>ma wake?<br />
Maliki <strong>na</strong> Shafi wamesema kuwa atalipa kilichoharibiwa usiku sio<br />
mcha<strong>na</strong>. Abu Hanifa akasema halipi kwa hali yoyote; iwe usiku au<br />
mcha<strong>na</strong>.<br />
Jamaa katika mafaqihi wa kishia wamesema kama alivyosema Maliki <strong>na</strong><br />
Shafi <strong>na</strong> wahakiki katika wao wakasema kuwa litakaloangaliwa ni hali <strong>ya</strong><br />
uzembe wa mfugaji au la; sio hali <strong>ya</strong> kuwa usiku au mcha<strong>na</strong>. Ikiwa mfugaji<br />
atazembea au kufan<strong>ya</strong> makusudi, basi atalipa. Na ikiwa atajichunga <strong>na</strong><br />
asipuuze, ikatokea bahati mba<strong>ya</strong> basi hatalipa.<br />
Na tuliifan<strong>ya</strong> milima <strong>na</strong> ndege kuwa pamoja <strong>na</strong> Daud imnyenyekee <strong>na</strong><br />
imsabihi (Mwenyezi Mungu). Na sisi tulikuwa ni wenye kuifan<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Imekuwa mashuhuri kuwa Daud alikuwa <strong>na</strong> sauti nyororo. Majaribio<br />
<strong>ya</strong>methibitisha kuwa wan<strong>ya</strong>ma wengi wa<strong>na</strong>burudika <strong>na</strong> ai<strong>na</strong> fulani <strong>ya</strong><br />
nyimbo <strong>na</strong> muziki 4 . Niliwahi kusoma kwenye gazeti kwamba nyoka aliwahi<br />
kutoka kwenye tundu <strong>ya</strong>ke ili astarehe <strong>na</strong> nyimbo za Ummu<br />
Kulthum, katika moja <strong>ya</strong> hafla <strong>ya</strong>ke. Nyimbo ilipokwisha akarudi sehemu<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Ama tasbibih <strong>ya</strong> mlima ni kwa njia <strong>ya</strong> majazi <strong>na</strong> kusifia zaidi tu; kama<br />
kusema: Amelichekesha <strong>na</strong> kuliliza jiwe. Au i<strong>na</strong>wezeka<strong>na</strong> ni kiuhakika<br />
4 Pia waswahili wa<strong>na</strong> msemo wakitaka kuusifia wimbo husema: “Wimbo uliomtoa<br />
nyoka pangoni” –Mtarjumu.<br />
52
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
hasa. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu yule aliyeweza kuufan<strong>ya</strong> moto kuwa baridi <strong>na</strong> salama<br />
kwa Ibrahim, ndiye a<strong>na</strong>weza pia kulifan<strong>ya</strong> jabali litoe tasbih pamoja <strong>na</strong><br />
Daud.<br />
Angalia A<strong>ya</strong> 69 <strong>ya</strong> Sura hii tuliyo <strong>na</strong>yo.<br />
Na tukamfundisha kutengeneza mavazi <strong>ya</strong> vita ili kuwakinga katika<br />
mapigano yenu. Je, mtakuwa wenye kushukuru?<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> mavazi <strong>ya</strong> vita hapa ni dera<strong>ya</strong>. A<strong>ya</strong> i<strong>na</strong>onyesha kuwa Daud<br />
ndiye mtu wa kwanza kutengeneza dera<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Ku<strong>na</strong> riwa<strong>ya</strong> i<strong>na</strong>yoelezea kwamba <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> hilo ni kuwa Daud alikuwa ni<br />
mfalme wa Israil <strong>na</strong> alikuwa a<strong>na</strong> desturi <strong>ya</strong> kupita mitaani kujulia hali za<br />
watu, bila <strong>ya</strong> yeye kujulika<strong>na</strong>. Siku moja akakuta<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> mtu akamuuliza<br />
kuhusu sera za mfalme Daud. Yule mtu akasema: A<strong>na</strong> sera nzuri sa<strong>na</strong>,<br />
kama asingekuwa a<strong>na</strong>kula kwenye hazi<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> serikali. Daud akaapa kuwa<br />
kuanzia siku hiyo hatakula kitu isipokuwa kilichotoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> mikono <strong>ya</strong>ke<br />
<strong>na</strong> jasho lake. <strong>Al</strong>ipojua Mwenyezi Mungu ikhlasi <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> ukweli wa nia<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke, alimalainishia chuma <strong>na</strong> kumfundisha kutengeneza dera<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Iwe sahihi riwa<strong>ya</strong> hii au la, ni kwamba i<strong>na</strong>ashria wajibu wa kufan<strong>ya</strong> bidii<br />
kubwa kuchunga masilahi <strong>ya</strong> watu <strong>na</strong> mali zao. Ku<strong>na</strong> Hadith mutawatir<br />
kwamba Mtume wa Mwenyezi Mungu, Muhammad (s.a.w.), alifariki<br />
akiwa ameweka rahani dera<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ke kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> kukopa kiasi fulani cha<br />
shayir, huku zikiwa mali za Bara arabu zote ziko mikononi mwake.<br />
Na upepo mkali kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> Suleiman, wendao kwa amri <strong>ya</strong>ke, katika<br />
ardhi tuliyoibariki. Na sisi ndio tu<strong>na</strong>ojua kila kitu.<br />
Dhahiri <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> hii i<strong>na</strong>fahamisha kuwa upepo ulikuwa ukimchukua<br />
Suleiman kwa amri <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu. Wala haku<strong>na</strong> haja <strong>ya</strong> kuleta<br />
taawili, maadamu akili i<strong>na</strong>kubalia<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> dhahiri hiyo. A<strong>ya</strong> iliyo wazi zaidi<br />
53
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
<strong>ya</strong> hii ni ile isemayo: “Na Suleiman tukamtiishia upepo mwendo wake<br />
asubuhi ni mwezi mmoja <strong>na</strong> mwendo wake jioni <strong>ya</strong>ke ni mwezi mmoja.”<br />
(34:12) Yaani asubuhi u<strong>na</strong>kwenda mwendo wa mwezi mmoja kwa kusafiri<br />
<strong>na</strong> ngamia <strong>na</strong> jioni vile vile.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> ardhi iliyobarikiwa ni ile iliyotajwa kwenye A<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong> 71 <strong>ya</strong><br />
Sura hii.<br />
U<strong>na</strong>weza kuuliza: Hapa Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) amesema upepo mkali<br />
<strong>na</strong> mahali pengine a<strong>na</strong>sema: pole pole: “Na tukamtiishia upepo uendao<br />
polepole kwa amri <strong>ya</strong>ke.” (38:36). Je, ku<strong>na</strong> wajihi gani wa A<strong>ya</strong> zote mbili?<br />
Jibu: Huwa mara u<strong>na</strong>kwenda kwa kasi <strong>na</strong> mara nyingine polepole kulinga<strong>na</strong><br />
<strong>na</strong> amri <strong>ya</strong>ke; sawa <strong>na</strong> gari au ndege.<br />
Na katika mashetani ku<strong>na</strong> wanompigia mbizi baharini <strong>na</strong> kumtolea<br />
lulu <strong>na</strong> marijani. Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> mashetani hapa ni majini<br />
Na kufan<strong>ya</strong> kazi nyinginezo; kama kujenga mihirabu <strong>na</strong> picha:<br />
“Wakimfanyia alipendalo, kama mihrabu <strong>na</strong> picha <strong>na</strong> masinia makubwa,<br />
kama hodhi <strong>na</strong> masufuria makubwa <strong>ya</strong>siyoondolewa mahali pake.”<br />
(34:13).<br />
Nasi tulikuwa walinzi wao, kwamba wasitoroke <strong>na</strong> kufan<strong>ya</strong> ukorofi.<br />
Hatu<strong>na</strong> la kuongeza zaidi <strong>ya</strong> ulivyothibisha wahyi kuwepo majini <strong>na</strong><br />
kwamba wao walimtumikia Suleiman <strong>na</strong> akili hailikatai hilo. Kwa hiyo<br />
basi haku<strong>na</strong> haja yoyote <strong>ya</strong> kuleta taawili <strong>na</strong> ku<strong>ya</strong>zungusha maneno. Imam<br />
<strong>Al</strong>i (a.s.) amesema: “Lau kama mtu angeliweza la kumfan<strong>ya</strong> adumu<br />
ulimwenguni au kuhepa mauti, basi angelikuwa Suleiman ambaye alitiishiwa<br />
ufalme, majini watu, utume <strong>na</strong> heshima kuu.”<br />
54
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
83. Na Ayyub aliopomlingania<br />
Mola wake: Hakika mimi<br />
imenigusa dhara, <strong>na</strong>we ndiye<br />
u<strong>na</strong>yerehemu zaidi kuliko<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>orehemu.<br />
84. Basi tukamkubalia <strong>na</strong> tuka-<br />
muondolea dhara <strong>na</strong> tukam-<br />
pa watu wake <strong>na</strong> mfano wao<br />
pamoja <strong>na</strong>o kuwa ni rehema<br />
itokayo kwetu <strong>na</strong> ukumbusho<br />
kwa wafan<strong>ya</strong>o ibada.<br />
85. Na Isamil <strong>na</strong> Idris <strong>na</strong><br />
Dhulkifl, wote walikuwa<br />
miongoni mwa wa<strong>na</strong>osubiri.<br />
86. Na tukawaingiza katika rehe-<br />
ma yetu. Hakika wao ni kati-<br />
ka watu wema.<br />
55
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
87. Na Dhun-Nun alipoondoka<br />
hali ameghadhabika <strong>na</strong> akad-<br />
hani kuwa hatutamdhikisha.<br />
Basi aliita katika giza kwam-<br />
ba: Hapa<strong>na</strong> Mola isipokuwa<br />
wewe, umetakasika. Hakika<br />
mimi nilikuwa miongoni mwa<br />
madhalimu.<br />
88. Basi tukamkubalia <strong>na</strong> tukam-<br />
wokoa kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> ghamu.<br />
Kama hivyo tu<strong>na</strong>waokoa<br />
wenye kuamini.<br />
89. Na Zakaria alipomwita Mola<br />
wake: Ewe Mola wangu!<br />
Usiniwache peke <strong>ya</strong>ngu <strong>na</strong><br />
wewe ndiye mbora wa<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>orithi.<br />
90. Basi tukamwitikia <strong>na</strong> tukampa<br />
Yah<strong>ya</strong> <strong>na</strong> tukamponyeshea<br />
mkewe. Hakika wao<br />
walikuwa wepesi kufan<strong>ya</strong><br />
kheri <strong>na</strong> wakituomba kwa<br />
hofu <strong>na</strong> walikuwa wakitunyenyekea.<br />
56
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
91. Na mwa<strong>na</strong>mke aliyelinda<br />
tupu <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> tukampulizia<br />
katika roho yetu <strong>na</strong> tukamfan<strong>ya</strong><br />
yeye <strong>na</strong> mwa<strong>na</strong>we<br />
kuwa ni ishara kwa walimwengu.<br />
NA AYYUB ALIOPOMLINGANIA MOLA WAKE<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 83 – 91<br />
MAANA<br />
Na Ayyub aliopomlingania Mola wake: Hakika mimi imenigusa dhara,<br />
<strong>na</strong>we ndiye u<strong>na</strong>yerehemu zaidi kuliko wa<strong>na</strong>orehemu. Basi<br />
tukamkubalia <strong>na</strong> tukamuondolea dhara.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> dhara ni madhara <strong>ya</strong> <strong>na</strong>fsi, kama vile maradhi, kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
neno la kiarabu dhurr.<br />
Likisomwa dharr ndio li<strong>na</strong>kuwa <strong>na</strong> maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> madhara <strong>ya</strong> kila kitu.<br />
Wafasiri <strong>na</strong> wapokezi wengi wamepokea riwa<strong>ya</strong> nyingi zi<strong>na</strong>zomuhusu<br />
Ayyub. Tu<strong>na</strong>lolifahamu sisi, kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> zi<strong>na</strong>zomzungumzia kwa<br />
uwazi <strong>na</strong> kwa ishara hapa <strong>na</strong> pia katika Sura Swad (38), ni kwamba Ayyub<br />
alikuwa <strong>na</strong> af<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ke nzuri akiwa ha<strong>na</strong> matatizo yoyote. Kisha mabalaa<br />
<strong>ya</strong>kaanza kumwandama kila upande, akawa ni wa kupigiwa mifano.<br />
Masaibu <strong>ya</strong>limpata yeye mwenyewe bi<strong>na</strong>fsi; akavumilia uvumilivu wa<br />
kiungwa<strong>na</strong>; <strong>na</strong> akabakia <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>kini <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> kumtegemea kwake Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu. Huzuni wala machungu ha<strong>ya</strong>kumfan<strong>ya</strong> aache kumtii Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu. Lakini muda ulivyomzidi <strong>na</strong> machungu <strong>na</strong>yo <strong>ya</strong>kazidi, alimshtakia<br />
57
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu mambo <strong>ya</strong>ke kwa maneno mawili tu: “Imenigusa dhara,<br />
<strong>na</strong>we ndiye u<strong>na</strong>yerehemu zaidi kuliko wa<strong>na</strong>orehemu,” <strong>na</strong> wala hakulalamika<br />
kwa kusema balaa gani hii iliyoniandama.<br />
Ndipo Mwenyezi Mungu akamwitikia maombi <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> akamuondolea<br />
mabalaa <strong>na</strong> kumrudisha katika hali nzuri zaidi <strong>ya</strong> alivyokuwa.<br />
Na tukampa watu wake <strong>na</strong> mfano wao pamoja <strong>na</strong>o kuwa ni rehema<br />
itokayo kwetu <strong>na</strong> ukumbusho kwa wafan<strong>ya</strong>o ibada.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu alimruzuku watoto <strong>na</strong> wajukuu zaidi <strong>ya</strong> wale<br />
aliowakosa, ikiwa ni rehema <strong>na</strong> malipo <strong>ya</strong> uvumilivu wake; <strong>na</strong> pia kukumbusha<br />
kwamba mwenye kuwa <strong>na</strong> subra <strong>na</strong> uvumilivu kama wa Ayyub, basi<br />
mwisho wake utakuwa kama wa Ayyub. Mwenyezi Mungu amehusisha<br />
kuwataja wenye kuabudu kwa kuashiria kuwa Mwenyezi Mungu yuko<br />
pamoja <strong>na</strong> mwenye subra aliye <strong>na</strong> ikhlasi kwa kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> vitendo v<strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Huu ndio ujumla wa maelezo <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> zi<strong>na</strong>zofungama<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> Ayyub; bila <strong>ya</strong><br />
kuingilia ufafanuzi walioutaja wapokezi <strong>na</strong> wasimulizi. Kwani huo hauambatani<br />
<strong>na</strong> itikadi wala uhai kwa mbali wala karibu. Miongoni mwa njia za<br />
Qur’an ni kukitaja kisa kwa <strong>ya</strong>le <strong>ya</strong>liyo <strong>na</strong> mazingatio yenye kunufaisha <strong>na</strong><br />
mawaidha <strong>ya</strong> kukan<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Na Isamil Na Idris Na Dhulkifl, wote walikuwa miongoni mwa wa<strong>na</strong>osubiri.<br />
Na tukawaingiza katika rehema yetu. Hakika wao ni katika<br />
watu wema.<br />
Ismail alifan<strong>ya</strong> subra <strong>ya</strong> kukubali kuchinjwa <strong>na</strong> akawa <strong>na</strong> uvumilivu wa<br />
kukaa katika nchi isiyokuwa <strong>na</strong> mimea wala kinywewa. Idris tumemueleza<br />
katika Juz. 16 (19:56).<br />
58
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Ama Dhulkifl wengi wamesema alikuwa Mtume; <strong>na</strong> baadhi wakasema<br />
alikuwa ni mja mwema tu <strong>na</strong> sio Mtume. Sisi tu<strong>na</strong>amini kwamba yeye ni<br />
miongoni mwa waliokuwa <strong>na</strong> subira <strong>na</strong> waja wema, kwa kufuata Qur’an<br />
ilivyosema, <strong>na</strong> wala hatutaulizwa zaidi <strong>ya</strong> hayo.<br />
Na Dhun-Nun alipoondoka hali ameghadhabika <strong>na</strong> akadhani kuwa<br />
hatutamdhikisha. Basi aliita katika giza kwamba: Hapa<strong>na</strong> Mola<br />
isipokuwa wewe, umetakasika. Hakika mimi nilikuwa miongoni mwa<br />
madhalimu.<br />
Dhun-Nun ni Yunus. Maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> neno ‘Nun” ni samaki. Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
a<strong>na</strong>sema:<br />
“Na vumilia hukumu <strong>ya</strong> Mola wako wala usiwe kama sahibu wa samaki”<br />
(68: 48).<br />
Hali ameghadhibika ni kuwaghadhibikia watu wake. Neno kudhikishwa<br />
limefasiriwa kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> neno Naqdira alyh; kama lilivyotumika mahali<br />
pengine:<br />
“Na yule ambaye imekuwa dhiki riziki <strong>ya</strong>ke” (65:7).<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> katika giza hapa ni ndani <strong>ya</strong> tumbo la samaki.<br />
Maa<strong>na</strong> kwa ujumla ni: kumbuka ewe Muhammad habari <strong>ya</strong> Yunus<br />
alipowalingania watu wake, lakini hawakumwitikia mwito wake,<br />
akawaondokea kwa kuwakasirikia, akadhani kuwa hatutamdhikisha kwa<br />
kumzuia n.k. <strong>Al</strong>ipomezwa <strong>na</strong> samaki akataka uokovu kutoka kwetu, basi<br />
tukamkubalia <strong>na</strong> tukamwokoa kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> ghamu. Kama hivyo<br />
tu<strong>na</strong>waokoa wenye kuamini.<br />
59
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> ghamu hapa ni tumbo la samaki; <strong>na</strong> kuokoka, ni kutolewa<br />
humo hadi kwenye nchi kavu. Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 11 (10:<br />
98).<br />
Na Zakaria alipomwita Mola wake: Ewe Mola wangu! Usiniwache<br />
peke <strong>ya</strong>ngu <strong>na</strong> wewe ndiye mbora wa wa<strong>na</strong>orithi. Basi tukamwitikia<br />
<strong>na</strong> tukampa Yah<strong>ya</strong> <strong>na</strong> tukamponyeshea mkewe.<br />
Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 3 ( 3: 38) <strong>na</strong> Juz. 16 (19:7).<br />
Hakika wao walikuwa wepesi kufan<strong>ya</strong> kheri <strong>na</strong> wakituomba kwa hofu<br />
<strong>na</strong> walikuwa wakitunyenyekea.<br />
Wao ni Zakari<strong>ya</strong>, mkewe <strong>na</strong> Yah<strong>ya</strong> au wale Mitume waliotangulia kutajwa.<br />
Wote walifan<strong>ya</strong> kheri kwa kutaka thawabu za Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong><br />
kuhofia adhabu <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> walikuwa wakimfuata Mwenyezi Mungu katika<br />
kila jambo.<br />
Na mwa<strong>na</strong>mke aliyelinda tupu <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> tukampulizia katika roho yetu<br />
<strong>na</strong> tukamfan<strong>ya</strong> yeye <strong>na</strong> mwa<strong>na</strong>we kuwa ni ishara kwa walimwengu.<br />
Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 3 (3: 45) <strong>na</strong> Juz. 16 (19: 16).<br />
92. Hakika umma wenu huu ni<br />
umma mmoja, <strong>na</strong> mimi ni<br />
Mola wenu kwa hivyo<br />
niabuduni.<br />
93. Na wakalivunja jambo lao<br />
bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>o. Wote watarejea<br />
kwetu.<br />
60
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
94. Na atendaye mema <strong>na</strong>ye ni<br />
mumin, basi haitakataliwa<br />
bidii <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> hakika sisi<br />
tutamwandikia.<br />
95. Na ni haramu kwa mji<br />
tuliouangamiza kwamba wao<br />
hawatarejea.<br />
96. Mpaka watakapofunguliwa<br />
Juju <strong>na</strong> Majuju, wakawa<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>teremka kutoka kila<br />
mlima.<br />
97. Na miadi <strong>ya</strong> haki itakaribia,<br />
ndipo <strong>ya</strong>takapokodoka<br />
macho <strong>ya</strong> wale waliokufuru.<br />
Ole wetu! Hakika tulikuwa<br />
tumeghafilika <strong>na</strong> ha<strong>ya</strong>, bali<br />
tulikuwa ni wenye kudhulu-<br />
mu.<br />
61
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
98. Hakika nyinyi <strong>na</strong> hayo m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>abudu<br />
badala <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ni kuni za<br />
Jahan<strong>na</strong>m, mtaifikia.<br />
99. Lau ha<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ngelikuwa ni<br />
UMMA MMOJA<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 92 – 100<br />
MAANA<br />
Hakika umma wenu huu ni umma mmoja, <strong>na</strong> mimi ni Mola wenu kwa<br />
hiyo niabuduni.<br />
Lugha<br />
miungu <strong>ya</strong>singeliingia <strong>na</strong><br />
wote watadumu humo.<br />
100. Lao humo ni kupiga may-<br />
owe <strong>na</strong> wala hawatasikika.<br />
Maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> neno umma ni watu wenye lugha moja <strong>na</strong> historia moja. Kisha<br />
neno hili likawa li<strong>na</strong>tumika zaidi kwa maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> dini <strong>na</strong> mila. Maa<strong>na</strong> ha<strong>ya</strong><br />
ndiyo <strong>ya</strong>liyokusudiwa hapa.<br />
62
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Umma wenu huu ni itikadi <strong>ya</strong> mitume ambayo ni tawhid pamoja <strong>na</strong> kufuata<br />
amri za Mwenyezi Mungu kwa kauli <strong>na</strong> vitendo. Msemo ‘wenu’<br />
u<strong>na</strong>elekezwa kwa watu wote.<br />
Maa<strong>na</strong> ni kuwa enyi watu wote! Shikeni dini <strong>ya</strong> Tawhidi waliyokuwa <strong>na</strong>yo<br />
Mitume <strong>na</strong> mumwabudu Mungu mmoja aliye peke <strong>na</strong> mumfanyie ikhlasi<br />
katika kauli <strong>na</strong> vitendo.<br />
Na wakalivunja jambo lao bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>o.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) aliwaamrisha wote wawe kwenye itikadi <strong>ya</strong><br />
tawhidi, lakini wakagawanyika wakawa makundi <strong>ya</strong> waka<strong>na</strong> Mungu <strong>na</strong><br />
washiriki<strong>na</strong>. Hata wale wafuasi wa Mitume <strong>na</strong>o wa<strong>na</strong>tuka<strong>na</strong><strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> kujitenga<br />
<strong>na</strong> wengine; bali hata wafuasi wa Mtume mmoja <strong>na</strong>o ni hivyo hivyo.<br />
Wote watarejea kwetu.<br />
Ha<strong>ya</strong> ni makemeo <strong>na</strong> hadhari kwa wale wa<strong>na</strong>ofarikia<strong>na</strong> wakawa vikundi.<br />
Na atendaye mema <strong>na</strong>ye ni mumin, basi haitakataliwa bidii <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong><br />
hakika sisi tutamwandikia.<br />
Imani pamoja <strong>na</strong> matendo mema ni njia <strong>ya</strong> Peponi <strong>na</strong> imani bila <strong>ya</strong> matendo<br />
haifai chochote. Hiyo ni kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
Mtukufu:<br />
“Basi mtu haitamfaa imani <strong>ya</strong>ke ambaye hakuamini zamani, au hakuchuma<br />
kheri kwa imani <strong>ya</strong>ke.” Juz. 8 (6:158).<br />
Ama matendo mema bila <strong>ya</strong> imani, humnufaisha mtendaji kwa <strong>na</strong>m<strong>na</strong><br />
moja au nyingine <strong>na</strong> huenda ikamfaa huko Akhera kwa kupunguziwa<br />
adhabu. Tume<strong>ya</strong>fafanua hayo katika Juz. 4 (3:158) kwenye kifungu ‘kafiri<br />
<strong>na</strong> amali njema’ Pia Umepita mfano wake katika Juz. 14 (16: 97)<br />
63
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Na ni haramu kwa mji tuliouangamiza kwamba wao hawatarejea.<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> hii ni jawabu la swali la kukadiria, kwamba je, washiriki<strong>na</strong> katika watu<br />
wa kijiji kilichoangamizwa <strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu kwa kufuru <strong>ya</strong>o,<br />
watarudishwa te<strong>na</strong> kuwa hai <strong>na</strong> kuadhibiwa huko Akhera, kama<br />
walivyoadhibiwa duniani?<br />
Ndio akajibu Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) kuwa watu wote, kesho watarejea<br />
kwa Mwenyezi Mungu; hata wale walioangamizwa duniani kwa dhambi<br />
zao <strong>na</strong> ni muhali kukosa kurejea kwa Mwenyezi Mungu baada <strong>ya</strong> mauti;<br />
bali haku<strong>na</strong> budi lazima watafufuliwa.<br />
Swali la pili, je i<strong>na</strong>faa kuadhibiwa akhera baada <strong>ya</strong> kuadhibiwa duniani?<br />
Huko si ni kuadhibu mara mbili kwa kosa moja?<br />
Jibu: Hapa<strong>na</strong>! Kuadhibiwa kwao duniani kulikuwa ni kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong><br />
kuwakadhibisha kwao Mitume waliowajia <strong>na</strong> miujuza; kama zi<strong>na</strong>vyofahamisha<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> hizi zifuatazo <strong>na</strong> nyinginginezo mfano wake:<br />
“Na kaumu <strong>ya</strong> Nuh walipowakadhibisha Mitume tuliwagharikisha”<br />
(25:37)<br />
“Kabla <strong>ya</strong>o walikadhibisha kamu <strong>ya</strong> Nuh <strong>na</strong> watu wa Rassi <strong>na</strong> Thamud <strong>na</strong><br />
A’d <strong>na</strong> Firauni <strong>na</strong> ndugu wa Lut <strong>na</strong> watu wa vichakani <strong>na</strong> kaumu <strong>ya</strong> Tubbai,<br />
wote waliwakadhibisha Mitume, kwa hiyo kiaga kikathibitika juu <strong>ya</strong>o.”<br />
(50: 12-14).<br />
64
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Ama adhabu <strong>ya</strong> Akhera ni <strong>ya</strong> ukafiri wenyewe <strong>na</strong> madhambi mengineyo;<br />
kama dhulma n.k. Kwa hiyo adhabu zi<strong>na</strong>kuwa nyingi kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> dhambi<br />
kuwa ai<strong>na</strong> nyingi, sio kwa dhambi moja.<br />
Mpaka watakapofunguliwa Juju <strong>na</strong> Majuju, wakawa wa<strong>na</strong>teremka<br />
kutoka kila mlima.<br />
Katika Juz. 16 (18: 94) tuliwanukuu baadhi <strong>ya</strong> wafasiri wakisema kuwa<br />
Juju ni wa Tatars <strong>na</strong> Majuju ni Wamongoli. Vile vile tumesema huko kuwa<br />
ukuta wa Juju <strong>na</strong> Majuju hauko te<strong>na</strong>. Kwa hiyo basi makusudio <strong>ya</strong> kufunguliwa<br />
Juju <strong>na</strong> Majuju ni kuenea kwao katika mabara.<br />
Vyovyote iwavyo sisi hatujawahi kusoma <strong>ya</strong> kutegemewa kuhusu Juju <strong>na</strong><br />
Majuju, si katika tafsiri wala mahali penginepo. Kwa hiyo tutasimama<br />
kwenye dhahiri <strong>ya</strong> nukuu <strong>ya</strong> Qur’an tu <strong>na</strong> ufafanuzi tutawachia wengine.<br />
Na miadi <strong>ya</strong> haki itakaribia, ndipo <strong>ya</strong>takapokodoka macho <strong>ya</strong> wale<br />
waliokufuru.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> miadi <strong>ya</strong> haki hapa ni Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma, hapo akili za waliokufuru<br />
zitapotea <strong>na</strong> macho <strong>ya</strong>tatoka kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> vituko v<strong>ya</strong> siku hiyo.<br />
Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 13 (14: 42).<br />
Ole wetu! Hakika tulikuwa tumeghafilika <strong>na</strong> ha<strong>ya</strong>, bali tulikuwa<br />
wenye kudhulumu.<br />
Yaani watasema hivyo. Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 8 (7: 5) <strong>na</strong><br />
katika juzuu <strong>na</strong> Sura hii tuliyo <strong>na</strong>yo A<strong>ya</strong> 14 <strong>na</strong> 46.<br />
Hakika nyinyi <strong>na</strong> hayo m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>abudu badala <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
kuni za Jahan<strong>na</strong>m, mtaifikia.<br />
Hapa wa<strong>na</strong>ambiwa washiriki<strong>na</strong> wa Makka. Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>abudu<br />
ni masa<strong>na</strong>mu <strong>ya</strong>o. Maa<strong>na</strong> ni kuwa, enyi washiriki<strong>na</strong>! Nyinyi <strong>na</strong> masa<strong>na</strong>mu<br />
yenu mtakuta<strong>na</strong> kwenye Jahan<strong>na</strong>mu kesho. Ku<strong>na</strong> Hadithi isemayo: “Mtu<br />
65
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
yuko pamoja <strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>yempenda.”<br />
U<strong>na</strong>weza kuuliza: Ku<strong>na</strong> faida gani <strong>ya</strong> kutiwa masa<strong>na</strong>mu kwenye<br />
Jahan<strong>na</strong>mu <strong>na</strong> ni mawe <strong>ya</strong>siyokuwa <strong>na</strong> utambuzi wala hisi<strong>ya</strong>?<br />
Wafasiri wamejibu kuwa lengo ni kuwazidishia masikitiko wale wa<strong>na</strong>o<strong>ya</strong>abudu,<br />
kila watakapo<strong>ya</strong>o<strong>na</strong> karibu <strong>na</strong>o. Lakini jawabu hili ni kiasi cha<br />
kuchukulia uzuri <strong>na</strong> hisia tu. Lilio bora ni kuicha A<strong>ya</strong> nyingine ijibu:<br />
“Basi uogopeni moto ambao kuni zake ni watu <strong>na</strong> mawe, uliowekewa<br />
makafiri.” Juz. 1 (2:24).<br />
Ku<strong>na</strong> riwa<strong>ya</strong> isemayo kuwa Ibn Az-Zab’ariy – mmoja wa washirki<strong>na</strong> wa<br />
kikuraishi <strong>na</strong> mshairi wao – aliingilia A<strong>ya</strong> hii kama ma<strong>ya</strong>hudi<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>mwabudu Uzayr <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>swara (wakristo) wa<strong>na</strong>mwabudu Masihi <strong>na</strong><br />
hawa wawili ni watu wa Peponi, kama a<strong>na</strong>vyosema Muhammad, sasa vipi<br />
aseme kila ki<strong>na</strong>choabudiwa ni kuni?<br />
Mtume akamjibu: Ni ujinga ulioje wako wewe kutojua lugha <strong>ya</strong> watu<br />
wako. Kwani huoni herufi ma (ambayo) ni <strong>ya</strong> visivyo <strong>na</strong> akili?<br />
Zaidi <strong>ya</strong> hayo maneno <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>wahusu washiriki<strong>na</strong> wa kikurashi, kama tulivyotangulia<br />
kusema <strong>na</strong>o wa<strong>na</strong>abudu masa<strong>na</strong>mu.<br />
Lau ha<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ngelikuwa ni miungu <strong>ya</strong>singeliingia <strong>na</strong> wote watadumu<br />
humo.<br />
Ha<strong>ya</strong> ni ishara <strong>ya</strong> masa<strong>na</strong>mu. Maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ko wazi, kwamba lau<br />
masa<strong>na</strong>mu <strong>ya</strong>ngelikuwa miungu <strong>ya</strong>singeliiingia motoni. Ni kama kusema:<br />
Lau ungelikuwa mwaminifu usingelifan<strong>ya</strong> khi<strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>, lakini umefan<strong>ya</strong><br />
khi<strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong> kwahiyo wewe si mwaminifu. Mfano huu katika mantiki u<strong>na</strong>itwa<br />
kutoa dalili kwa kipimo cha kuvua (istith<strong>na</strong>iyy).<br />
66
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Lao humo ni kupiga mayowe <strong>na</strong> wala hawatasikika.<br />
Hapa a<strong>na</strong>ambiwa kila mkosaji, awe mwislamu au kafiri. Humo ni humo<br />
ndani <strong>ya</strong> Jahan<strong>na</strong>m. Maa<strong>na</strong> ni kuwa kila mkosaji atakuwa katika Jahan<strong>na</strong>m<br />
akilalama kwa machungu; hatasikia neno la upole wala huruma, bali<br />
atakayemuo<strong>na</strong> atamtaha<strong>ya</strong>riza <strong>na</strong> kumsema:<br />
“Na wenye kudhulumu wataambiwa onjeni <strong>ya</strong>le mliyokuwa mki<strong>ya</strong>chuma.”<br />
(39: 24).<br />
101. Hakika wale ambao umewatangulia<br />
wema kutoka<br />
kwetu, hao watatenganishwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> hayo.<br />
102. Hawatasikia mvumo wake.<br />
Nao watudumu katika <strong>ya</strong>le<br />
ambayo <strong>na</strong>fsi zao zi<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong>tamani.<br />
103. Hiyo fazaa kubwa<br />
haitawahuzunisha. Na<br />
Malaika watawapokea: Hii<br />
ndiyo siku yenu mliyokuwa<br />
mkiahidiwa.<br />
67
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
104. Siku tutakapozikunja mbingu<br />
mkunjo wa karatasi za<br />
vitabu. Kama tulivyoanza<br />
umbo la mwanzo tutalirudisha<br />
te<strong>na</strong>. Ni ahadi iliyo juu<br />
yetu. Hakika sisi ni wenye<br />
kufan<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
105. Na hakika tulikwishaandika<br />
katika Zaburi baada <strong>ya</strong><br />
ukumbusho kuwa Ardhi<br />
watairithi waja wangu walio<br />
wema.<br />
106. Hakika katika ha<strong>ya</strong> ku<strong>na</strong><br />
ujumbe<br />
ibada.<br />
kwa wafan<strong>ya</strong>o<br />
107. Na hatukukutuma ila uwe ni<br />
rehema kwa walimwengu.<br />
ARDHI WATARITHI WAJA WANGU WALIO WEMA<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 101 – 107<br />
MAANA<br />
Hakika wale ambao umewatangulia wema kutoka kwetu, hao<br />
watatenganishwa <strong>na</strong> hayo .<br />
68
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu aliwaahidi wenye takua kuamilia<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong>o kwa wema.<br />
Miongoni mwa wema huo ni kuokoka <strong>na</strong> moto.<br />
Hawatasikia mvumo wake.<br />
Hii ni kusisitiza watakavyokuwa mbali <strong>na</strong>o.<br />
Nao watudumu katika <strong>ya</strong>le ambayo <strong>na</strong>fsi zao zi<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong>tamani.<br />
Watasalimika <strong>na</strong> adhabu <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu wakineemeshwa kwenye<br />
Pepo <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Hiyo fazaa kubwa haitawahuzunisha, sikwambii ndogo te<strong>na</strong>. Kwani<br />
fazaa zi<strong>na</strong> daraja, kuanzia machungu <strong>ya</strong> kukata roho, upweke wa kaburini,<br />
kisha kutoka makaburini kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> hisabu hadi kuingia Jahan<strong>na</strong>m.<br />
Na Malaika watawapokea: Hii ndiyo siku yenu mliyokuwa mkiahidiwa.<br />
Malaika watawapokea kwa takrima <strong>na</strong> kuwaambia kuwa Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu amewakusan<strong>ya</strong> kwenye siku hii aliyowaahidi kwa ufalme wa<br />
daima <strong>na</strong> neema isiyokatika. A<strong>ya</strong> hizi tatu zi<strong>na</strong>fupilizwa <strong>na</strong> neno:<br />
Au neno:<br />
“Je, malipo <strong>ya</strong> hisani si ni hisani tu.” (55:60)<br />
“Kwa wafan<strong>ya</strong>o wema ni wema.” Juz.11 (10:26).<br />
69
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Siku tutakapozikunja mbingu mkunjo wa karatasi za vitabu.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> vitabu hapa ni maandishi <strong>ya</strong> matamko <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>yoa<strong>ya</strong>andikwa<br />
kwenye karatasi. Maa<strong>na</strong> ni kuwa Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) atazikunja<br />
sa<strong>ya</strong>ri, siku <strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma, pamoja <strong>na</strong> ukubwa <strong>na</strong> wingi wake; kama<br />
i<strong>na</strong>vyokunjwa karatasi yenye maandishi; kiasi ambacho kila sa<strong>ya</strong>ri<br />
itafa<strong>na</strong><strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> herufi au neno lilo kwenye karatasi.<br />
Kama tulivyoanza umbo la mwanzo tutalirudisha te<strong>na</strong>. Ni ahadi iliyo<br />
juu yetu. Hakika sisi ni wenye kufan<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) amefa<strong>na</strong>nisha ufufuo <strong>na</strong> kuumba kwa kwanza;<br />
kwamba, kama kulivyowezeka<strong>na</strong> kwa kwanza, basi kwa pili pia kuu<strong>na</strong>wezeka<strong>na</strong>.<br />
Si muhali kwa Mwenyezi Mungu kutekeleza ahadi <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Hilo halimshindi Mwenyezi Mungu; kwani mwenye kuumba ulimwengu<br />
basi hawezi kushindwa kuurudisha te<strong>na</strong> baada <strong>ya</strong> kuharibika <strong>na</strong> kutawanyika:<br />
“Na Yeye ndiye a<strong>na</strong>yeanzisha uumbaji, kisha ataurudisha. Na hilo ni jepesi<br />
zaidi kwake” (30:27).<br />
TENA MAHDI ANAYENGOJEWA<br />
Na hakika tulikwishaandika katika Zaburi baada <strong>ya</strong> ukumbusho<br />
kuwa Ardhi watairithi waja wangu walio wema.<br />
Zaburi ni kitabu cha Daud <strong>na</strong> ukumbusho ni vitabu v<strong>ya</strong> mbinguni vilivyotangulia;<br />
kama vile vitabu v<strong>ya</strong> Ibrahim <strong>na</strong> Musa. Maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ke ni kuwa<br />
utawala wa dunia, ingawaje hivi sasa uko mikononi mwa mataghuti<br />
waovu, lakini Mwenyezi Mungu atauhamisha uende kwa walio wema.<br />
Hilo hali<strong>na</strong> budi. Hapo amani <strong>na</strong> uadilifu utaenea ardhini <strong>na</strong> watu wote<br />
wataneemeka <strong>na</strong> kheri za Ardhi <strong>na</strong> baraka zake.<br />
70
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Ku<strong>na</strong> Hadithi nyingi zenye maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> hii; miongoni mwazo ni ile aliyoipokea<br />
Abu Daud katika Kitabu cha Su<strong>na</strong>n, ambacho ni mojawapo <strong>ya</strong><br />
Sahihi sita: “Amesema Mtume wa Mwenyezi Mungu: Lau haitabakia katika<br />
dunia isipokuwa siku moja tu, basi Mwenyezi Mungu angeliirefusha<br />
siku hiyo mpaka amtume mtu kutoka katika watu wa nyumba <strong>ya</strong>ngu (Ahlu<br />
bayt) ji<strong>na</strong> lake li<strong>na</strong>fa<strong>na</strong><strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> ji<strong>na</strong> langu, <strong>na</strong> ji<strong>na</strong> la baba <strong>ya</strong>ke ni kama la<br />
baba <strong>ya</strong>ngu, ataijaza ardhi uadilifu baada <strong>ya</strong> kujazwa dhulma <strong>na</strong> jeuri” 5<br />
Kanuni <strong>ya</strong> maisha hailikatai hilo, bali i<strong>na</strong>lithibitisha <strong>na</strong> kulisisitiza. Ikiwa<br />
nguvu hivi sasa ziko mikononi mwa un<strong>ya</strong>ma wenye kudhuru wa umoja wa<br />
mataifa, baraza la usalama n.k. basi haku<strong>na</strong> litakalozuia, siku moja kugeuka<br />
nguvu hiyo kutoka mikononi mwa madhalimu waovu hadi kwa watu wa<br />
haki <strong>na</strong> uadilifu; bali maumbile <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>penda kujikomboa <strong>na</strong> dhulma.<br />
Pia ku<strong>na</strong> misingi isemayo: “Kila kilicho katika ardhi ki<strong>na</strong> harakati, kama<br />
ilivyo <strong>na</strong> harakati ardhi <strong>na</strong> kwamba kudumu hali ni muhali.” Yote hayo<br />
<strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>pelekea kuwa hatimaye nguvu zitakuwa mikononi mwa wema wa<strong>na</strong>ofaa.<br />
Hakika katika ha<strong>ya</strong> ku<strong>na</strong> ujumbe kwa wafan<strong>ya</strong>o ibada.<br />
Ha<strong>ya</strong> ni ha<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kuwa ardhi itarithiwa <strong>na</strong> waja wema; hata kama ni baada<br />
<strong>ya</strong> muda. Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> wafan<strong>ya</strong>o ibada hapa ni wale wa<strong>na</strong>opata mawaidha<br />
kwa kuzingatia <strong>na</strong> kunufaika <strong>na</strong> maonyo.<br />
Na hatukukutuma ila uwe ni rehema kwa walimwengu.<br />
Maneno <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>elekezwa kwa Muhammad (s.a.w.). Risala <strong>ya</strong>ke ni rehema<br />
kwa wa mwanzo <strong>na</strong> wa mwisho. Huko nyuma tumeeleza mara nyingi<br />
kuhusu misingi <strong>ya</strong> risala hiyo <strong>na</strong> mafunzo <strong>ya</strong>ke. I<strong>na</strong>tosha, kuthibitisha<br />
hilo, kauli za mwenye risala hiyo; kama vile: “Hakumwamini Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu yule ambaye watu hawamwamini. Likikuhuzunisha ovu <strong>na</strong> likakufurahisha<br />
jema, basi wewe ni mumin.”<br />
5 Tumezungumzia kuhusu Mahdi a<strong>na</strong>yengojewa katika Juz. 1( 2:127 - 129) <strong>na</strong><br />
Juz. 15 (17: 58)<br />
71
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Ni kwa hisia hizi ndio uadilifu utasimama, amani kuenea <strong>na</strong> maisha kuwa<br />
bora. Tumezungumzia kwa ufafanuzi kuhusu hilo katika Juz. 7 (6:92).<br />
108. Sema: Hakika umeletwa<br />
wahyi kwangu <strong>ya</strong> kwamba<br />
hakika Mungu wenu ni<br />
Mungu mmoja tu. Je nyinyi<br />
mmesilimu?<br />
109. Kama wakikataa, basi sema:<br />
Nimewatangazia sawasawa.<br />
Wala sijui <strong>ya</strong>ko karibu au<br />
mbali hayo mliyoahidiwa.<br />
110. Hakika Yeye a<strong>na</strong>jua kauli <strong>ya</strong><br />
dhahiri <strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>jua m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>ficha.<br />
111. Wala sijui pengine huu ni<br />
mtihani tu kwenu <strong>na</strong> starehe<br />
mpaka muda kidogo.<br />
112. Akasema: Mola wangu!<br />
Hukumu kwa haki. Na Mola<br />
wetu ni Mwingi wa rehema<br />
aombwaye msaada juu <strong>ya</strong><br />
m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>sifia.<br />
72
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
HAKIKA MUNGU WENU NI MMOJA TU<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 108 – 112<br />
MAANA<br />
Sema: Hakika umeletwa wahyi kwangu <strong>ya</strong> kwamba hakika Mungu<br />
wenu ni Mungu mmoja tu. Je nyinyi mmesilimu?<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu alimwarisha Mtume wake awaambie washiriki<strong>na</strong> kuwa<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ameniletea wahyi kwamba Yeye ni mmoja tu ha<strong>na</strong><br />
mshirika katika kuumba kwake <strong>na</strong> wala katika ujuzi wake.<br />
Ulimwengu huu <strong>na</strong> maajabu <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> kanuni zake u<strong>na</strong>shuhudia kwa uwazi<br />
juu <strong>ya</strong> umoja, uweza <strong>na</strong> ukuu wake Mwenyezi Mungu Mtukufu. Basi kwa<br />
nini hamuamini <strong>na</strong> kufuata amri <strong>ya</strong>ke? Kwanini m<strong>na</strong>danganyika kuacha<br />
kumwabudu Yeye <strong>na</strong> kwenda kuabudu mawe <strong>ya</strong>siyodhuru wala kunufaisha?<br />
Kama wakikataa, basi sema: Nimewatangazia sawasawa.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> kuwalazimu hoja <strong>ya</strong> kufikisha <strong>na</strong> maonyo, Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
alimwamrisha Mtume wake mtukufu awaambie kuwa nimekishatekeleza<br />
wajibu wangu <strong>na</strong> nikafikisha risala <strong>ya</strong> Mola wangu. Kwa hiyo haukubaki<br />
udhuru wowote kwenu.<br />
Wala sijui <strong>ya</strong>ko karibu au mbali hayo mliyoahidiwa.<br />
Mimi ni<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>kini <strong>na</strong> adhabu yenu, kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu Mwenyezi Mungu ameiahadi<br />
<strong>na</strong> kuwahadhirisha <strong>na</strong>yo, <strong>na</strong> ahadi <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu ni <strong>ya</strong> kweli<br />
<strong>na</strong> adhabu <strong>ya</strong>ke pia ni kali zaidi, lakini sijui itakuwa lini. Ni sawa iwe<br />
karibu au mbali, lakini i<strong>na</strong> wakati wake. Ngojeni <strong>na</strong>mi niko pamoja <strong>na</strong>nyi<br />
katika wenye kungojea.<br />
73
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
Hakika Yeye a<strong>na</strong>jua kauli <strong>ya</strong> dhahiri <strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>jua m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>ficha.<br />
Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 16 (20:7).<br />
Wala sijui pengine huu ni mtihani tu kwenu <strong>na</strong> starehe mpaka muda<br />
kidogo.<br />
Sijui ku<strong>na</strong> hekima gani <strong>ya</strong> kupewa kwenu muda <strong>na</strong> kucheleweshewa<br />
adhabu. Je Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) ametaka kumdhirisha kila mmoja<br />
hakika <strong>ya</strong>ke, aweze kutubia mwema <strong>na</strong> aendelee mouvu au ametaka<br />
mustarehe siku zilizobakia kwenye umri wenu? Mwenyezi Mungu ndiye<br />
ajuaye.<br />
Akasema (Muhammad): Mola wangu! Hukumu kwa haki.<br />
Yaani idhihirishe haki <strong>na</strong> uwanusuru watu wake kwa wale wa<strong>na</strong>oipinga.<br />
Na Mola wetu ni Mwingi wa rehema aombwaye msaada juu <strong>ya</strong> m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>sema<br />
kuwa masa<strong>na</strong>mu yenu ni miungu <strong>na</strong> madai yenu kwangu kuwa ni<br />
mzushi.<br />
“Ewe Mtume wa Mwenyezi Mungu! Wewe ni mtukufu kwa kila<br />
a<strong>na</strong>yekuzulia. Wema ni wa yule a<strong>na</strong>yekufuata, akachukua athari <strong>ya</strong>ko <strong>na</strong><br />
akamwambia mzushi, kama vile ulivyosema wewe: Na Mola wetu ni<br />
Mwingi wa rehema aombwaye msaada juu <strong>ya</strong> m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>sifia.”<br />
74
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
SURA HAJJ<br />
Baadhi <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> zake zimeshuka Makka<br />
<strong>na</strong> nyingine Madi<strong>na</strong>.<br />
I<strong>na</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> 78.<br />
Kwa ji<strong>na</strong> la Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
Mwingi wa rehema Mwenye kurehemu.<br />
1. Enyi watu! Mcheni Mola<br />
wenu. Hakika tetemeko la saa<br />
ni jambo kuu.<br />
2. Siku mtakapoio<strong>na</strong>, kila<br />
mwenye kunyonyesha atamsahau<br />
amnyonyeshae <strong>na</strong> kila<br />
mwenye mimba ataiharibu<br />
mimba <strong>ya</strong>ke. Na utawao<strong>na</strong><br />
watu wamelewa, <strong>na</strong> kumbe<br />
hawakulewa. Lakini adhabu<br />
<strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu ni kali.<br />
3. Na miongoni mwa watu ku<strong>na</strong><br />
a<strong>na</strong>yejadilia<strong>na</strong> juu <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu bila <strong>ya</strong><br />
elimu <strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>mfuata kila<br />
shetani muasi.<br />
75
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
4. Ameandikiwa kwamba<br />
a<strong>na</strong>yemtawalisha shetani, basi<br />
huyo hakika atampoteza <strong>na</strong><br />
atamwongoza katika adhabu<br />
<strong>ya</strong> moto mkali.<br />
5. Enyi watu! Ikiwa m<strong>na</strong> shaka<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kufufuliwa, basi kwa hakika<br />
tuliwaumba kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
udongo kisha kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
tone kisha kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> pande<br />
la damu kisha kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
pande la n<strong>ya</strong>ma lenye umbo <strong>na</strong><br />
lisilokuwa <strong>na</strong> umbo. Ili<br />
tuwabainishie. Na tu<strong>na</strong>liweka<br />
katika matumbo <strong>ya</strong> kizazi<br />
mpaka muda uliowekwa.<br />
Kisha tu<strong>na</strong>watoa hali <strong>ya</strong> kuwa<br />
mtoto mchanga kisha mfikie<br />
kukomaa kwenu. Na wapo<br />
miongoni mwenu wa<strong>na</strong>okufa<br />
<strong>na</strong> wapo miongoni mwenu<br />
wanorudishwa kwenye umri<br />
wa unyonge kabisa hata asijue<br />
kitu baada <strong>ya</strong> kuwa a<strong>na</strong>kijua.<br />
Na u<strong>na</strong>io<strong>na</strong> ardhi imekufa,<br />
lakini tu<strong>na</strong>po<strong>ya</strong>teremsha maji<br />
juu <strong>ya</strong>ke, husisimka <strong>na</strong> kututumka<br />
<strong>na</strong> kumea kila ai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong><br />
mimea mizuri.<br />
76
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
6. Hayo ni kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu hakika<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ni haki <strong>na</strong><br />
kwamba hakika yeye ndiye<br />
Mwenye kuhuisha wafu <strong>na</strong><br />
kwamba hakika Yeye ni<br />
Muweza wa kila kitu.<br />
7. Na kwamba saa itakuja<br />
hapa<strong>na</strong> shaka kwa hilo, <strong>na</strong><br />
kwamba Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
atawafufua walio makaburini.<br />
UFUFUO<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 1 - 7<br />
MAANA<br />
Katika A<strong>ya</strong> hizi ku<strong>na</strong> kutahadharisha kuhusu siku <strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma pamoja <strong>na</strong><br />
kuashiria vitu <strong>na</strong> shida za siku hiyo. Vile vile kuwashutumu wale walioghafilika<br />
<strong>na</strong>cho; kisha kutoa dalili <strong>ya</strong> ufufuo. Ufafanuzi ni kama ufuatavyo:<br />
1. Enyi watu! Mcheni Mola wenu. Hakika tetemeko la saa ni jambo<br />
kuu.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> saa ni siku <strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma. Kimeitwa hivyo kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu kila mtu<br />
atakifikia; kama a<strong>na</strong>vyosema Mulla Sadra katika kitabu <strong>Al</strong>-Asfar.<br />
Maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> tetemeko la ki<strong>ya</strong>ma ni kuharibika ulimwengu ikiwa ni pamoa <strong>na</strong><br />
ardhi <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> mbingu <strong>ya</strong>ke. Hizo zitachanganyika <strong>na</strong> pia bara <strong>na</strong> bahari <strong>na</strong><br />
vizuizi vitaondoka. Miili itatoka makakburini kama picha isiyo <strong>na</strong> roho.<br />
77
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Siku mtakapoio<strong>na</strong>, kila mwenye kunyonyesha atamsahau amnyonyeshae<br />
<strong>na</strong> kila mwenye mimba ataiharibu mimba <strong>ya</strong>ke. Na utawao<strong>na</strong><br />
watu wamelewa, <strong>na</strong> kumbe hawakulewa. Lakini adhabu <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu ni kali.<br />
Hiki ni ki<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong> cha vituko v<strong>ya</strong> siku <strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma <strong>na</strong> shida zake; ambapo hakutakuwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> mnyonyeshaji wala mwenye mimba sku hiyo. Yaani, lau angelikuwako<br />
mwenye kunyonyesha basi angelimsau mwa<strong>na</strong>we <strong>na</strong> mwenye<br />
mimba angelizaa. Na watu wote watagonga<strong>na</strong> huku <strong>na</strong> huko kama walevi.<br />
MJADALA WAKIJINGA NA UPOTEVU<br />
2. Na miongoni mwa watu wako wa<strong>na</strong>ojadilia<strong>na</strong> juu <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu bila <strong>ya</strong> elimu.<br />
Mtu yeyote atakuwa ni mmoja wapo kati <strong>ya</strong> wawili: Ama atakuwa hajui au<br />
atakuwa ni mjuzi. Huyo mjuzi <strong>na</strong>ye yuko katika hali mbili: Ama atakuwa<br />
ni mwenye insafu au atakuwa mpotevu. Mwenye insafu ni yule a<strong>na</strong>yesema<br />
<strong>ya</strong>le a<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>jua <strong>na</strong> ku<strong>ya</strong>n<strong>ya</strong>mazia asiyo<strong>ya</strong>jua. Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
ameueleza wadhifa wa asiyejua kwa kusema:<br />
“Basi waulizeni wenye kumbukumbu, ikiwa nyinyi hamjui.” (21:7).<br />
Ikiwa atauepuka wadhifa huu, basi atakuwa amehusika <strong>na</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong> Imam<br />
<strong>Al</strong>i (a.s.): “Yu mjinga, a<strong>na</strong>tangatanga gizani bila <strong>ya</strong> mwongozo.”<br />
Huu ndio ujinga alioukusudia Mwenyezi Mungu kwenye kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke hii <strong>na</strong><br />
pia kauli itakayokuja kwenye A<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong> 8 <strong>ya</strong> Sura hii: “Na katika watu wapo<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>ojadilia<strong>na</strong> juu <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu bila <strong>ya</strong> ilmu wala uongufu wala<br />
Kitabu chenye nuru.”<br />
78
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Hajui njia <strong>ya</strong> kumjua Mwenyezi Mungu, lakini a<strong>na</strong>bisha<strong>na</strong> kuhusu Mungu,<br />
huku akisema: lau Mwenyezi Mungu angelikuwako tungelimuo<strong>na</strong>. Kwa<br />
mantiki ha<strong>ya</strong>, a<strong>na</strong>taka kufasiri mada kwa isiyokuwa mada, kuo<strong>na</strong> kwa<br />
macho kile ki<strong>na</strong>choneka<strong>na</strong> kwa akili tu <strong>na</strong> kumgusa kwa mkono muumba<br />
wa mbingu <strong>na</strong> ardhi. Huyu ha<strong>na</strong> tofauti <strong>na</strong> yule a<strong>na</strong>yetaka kufan<strong>ya</strong> mtihani<br />
wa <strong>na</strong>dhari<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong> ‘ushahidi ni wa mwenye kudai <strong>na</strong> kiapo ni kwa mwenye<br />
kukanusha’ kwenye kiwanda. Au kutaka kufan<strong>ya</strong> mtihani wa kuendesha<br />
gari kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> hisia zake.<br />
Wakati nikiandika maelezo ha<strong>ya</strong> nimekumbuka tulipokua Najaf tukisoma,<br />
kiasi cha miaka arobaini iliyopita. Siku moja tulipokuwa kwenye darasa<br />
tukisiliza mhadhara wa mwalimu, mmoja wa wa<strong>na</strong>funzi akamkatiza mwalimu<br />
<strong>na</strong> akatoa ushahidi usiokuwa <strong>na</strong> uhusiano wowote <strong>na</strong> maudhui kwa<br />
umbali wala karibu. Basi mwalimu akaacha<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong>ye akawaangalia wa<strong>na</strong>funzi<br />
wengine <strong>na</strong> akasema:<br />
“Hapo zamani kulikuwa <strong>na</strong> mtu mmoja mwenye akili punguani, ji<strong>na</strong> lake<br />
ni Bau. Siku moja alipita barabarani akao<strong>na</strong> watu wamekusanyika.<br />
Akauliza, kulikoni? Akaambiwa fulani ameanguka kutoka juu <strong>ya</strong> nyumba,<br />
amaevunjikavunjika viungo hatujui kama ataishi <strong>na</strong> watu wake hawa<strong>na</strong> la<br />
kufan<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Basi Bau akasema: “Mimi ni<strong>na</strong> suluhisho, mfungeni kamba mumkaze<br />
sawasawa kisha avutwe mpaka juu <strong>ya</strong> nyumba kule alikotokea, atapo<strong>na</strong><br />
tu.” Watu walipomcheka, alitoa hoja kwamba mwaka ja<strong>na</strong> fulani alianguka<br />
kisimani, wakamfunga kamba <strong>na</strong> wakamtoa, akasalimika.”<br />
Mantiki ha<strong>ya</strong> hasa ndiyo <strong>ya</strong> yule a<strong>na</strong>yeka<strong>na</strong> kuweko Mungu kwa vile<br />
hamuoni. Ulimwengu huu <strong>na</strong> nidhamu <strong>ya</strong>ke a<strong>na</strong>uo<strong>na</strong>, lakini bado a<strong>na</strong>dai<br />
kuwa haufahamishi kuwako aliyeutengeneza <strong>na</strong> kuuwekea nidhamu.<br />
Sisi tu<strong>na</strong>amini ushahidi <strong>na</strong> majaribio, lakini tu<strong>na</strong>amini vilievile kuwa<br />
majaribio ha<strong>ya</strong> ha<strong>ya</strong>wezi kuwa kwenye kila kitu, bali <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>kuwa kwenye<br />
79
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
baadhi <strong>ya</strong> vitu v<strong>ya</strong> kimaada. Ama vitu v<strong>ya</strong> kiroho <strong>na</strong> v<strong>ya</strong> kibi<strong>na</strong>damu vi<strong>na</strong><br />
njia nyingine <strong>ya</strong> kujua.<br />
Tu<strong>na</strong>sema hivi tukiwa <strong>na</strong> uhakika kwamba hivi viwili vi<strong>na</strong>kwenda pamoja<br />
vikikamilisha<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> kwamba mtu a<strong>na</strong>hitajia maada. Misimamo kama vile<br />
haki <strong>na</strong> kheri hai<strong>na</strong> budi iwe <strong>na</strong> athari i<strong>na</strong>yooneka<strong>na</strong>, vinginevyo ingelikuwa<br />
ni matamshi tu <strong>ya</strong>siyokuwa <strong>na</strong> maa<strong>na</strong> yoyote. Lakini hii haimaanishi<br />
kuwa ndio njia <strong>ya</strong> maarifa peke <strong>ya</strong>ke; bali i<strong>na</strong>tofautia<strong>na</strong> kwa kutofautia<strong>na</strong><br />
vitu. Kwa hiyo ushahidi <strong>na</strong> majaribio ni <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> kujua vitu v<strong>ya</strong><br />
kimaada <strong>na</strong> akili ni <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> kujua vinginevyo visivyokuwa maada.<br />
Tumezungumzia kuhusu maarifa <strong>na</strong> <strong>saba</strong>bu zake katika Juz. 1(2:3-5)<br />
Kwa ufupi ni kuwa mwenye kusema: Simwamini Mungu mpaka nimuone,<br />
amekiri yeye mwenyewe kwamba hataki kumwamini Mwenyezi Mungu,<br />
hata kama ataletewa dalili elfu <strong>na</strong> moja. Maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ke ni kuwa a<strong>na</strong>kubali<br />
kuwa yeye ni mjinga mwenye kiburi. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
hawezi kuoneka<strong>na</strong> kwa macho <strong>na</strong> kwamba njia <strong>ya</strong> kujua haikomei kwenye<br />
macho tu. Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong>mtaka bi<strong>na</strong>damu afanye utafiti, uchunguzi,<br />
mjadala <strong>na</strong> mdahalo, lakini kielimu <strong>na</strong> kuchunga haki, sio kiujinga <strong>na</strong><br />
kiupofu.<br />
Na a<strong>na</strong>mfuata kila shetani muasi.<br />
Kila a<strong>na</strong>yeweza kuvunga <strong>na</strong> kuficha hakika <strong>ya</strong>ke, basi huyo ni shetani.<br />
Shetani asi ni yule ambaye vitendo v<strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> kauli zake zote zimejaa ufisadi.<br />
Shetani huyu akiingia kwenye akili <strong>ya</strong> mtu tu humuongoza kwenye<br />
upotevu <strong>na</strong> maangamizi. Hii ndio maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu:<br />
ameandikiwa kwamba a<strong>na</strong>yemtawalisha shetani, basi huyo hakika<br />
atampoteza <strong>na</strong> atamwongoza katika adhabu <strong>ya</strong> moto mkali.<br />
Upotevu <strong>na</strong> adhabu <strong>ya</strong> moto hawezi kuepuka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong>yo yule mwenye kufuata<br />
wapotevu <strong>na</strong> wafisadi, ambao wa<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong>potoa maneno <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi<br />
80
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Mungu, wakihalalisha <strong>na</strong> kuharamisha kwa hawa zao <strong>na</strong> matakwa <strong>ya</strong>o.<br />
3 Enyi watu ikiwa m<strong>na</strong> shaka <strong>ya</strong> kufufuliwa, basi kwa hakika tuliwaumba<br />
kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> udongo.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) kumhadharisha yule a<strong>na</strong>yebisha<strong>na</strong><br />
kuhusu Mwenyezi Mungu bila <strong>ya</strong> elimu, sasa a<strong>na</strong>taja dalili za ufufuo<br />
ambao mjinga a<strong>na</strong>uifikiria kuwa hauwezekani.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) amezileta dalili hizi kwa mifano yenye kuhisiwa,<br />
<strong>na</strong>yo ni kuwa: Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu amemuumba mtu kutoka<strong>na</strong><br />
<strong>na</strong> mchanga moja kwa moja, au kupitia kitu kingine. <strong>Al</strong>imuumba Adam,<br />
baba wa watu, moja kwa moja kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> mchanga <strong>na</strong> akatuumba sisi<br />
wa<strong>na</strong> wa Adam kupitia kitu kingine. Kila mmoja wenu a<strong>na</strong>kuwa kutoka<strong>na</strong><br />
<strong>na</strong> manii <strong>na</strong> damu <strong>na</strong>vyo vi<strong>na</strong>toka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> chakula ambacho ki<strong>na</strong>toka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
mchanga <strong>na</strong> maji. Kwa hiyo mchanga ndio msingi wa kupatika<strong>na</strong> mtu,<br />
kisha kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> tone la manii; kama alivyosema Mwenyezi Mungu:<br />
“Je, hakuwa ni tone la manii lililoshushwa?” (75:37).<br />
Kisha kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> pande la damu. Tone la manii li<strong>na</strong>geuka kuwa<br />
kipande cha damu iliyoganda, kisha kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> pande la n<strong>ya</strong>ma. Pande<br />
la damu <strong>na</strong>lo li<strong>na</strong>badilika kuwa pande la n<strong>ya</strong>ma lenye umbo <strong>na</strong> lisilokuwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> umbo. Yaani baadhi <strong>ya</strong>ke imetimia umbo <strong>na</strong> sehemu haijatimia.<br />
Ili tuwabainishie uwezo wetu wa kufufua <strong>na</strong> mengineyo.<br />
Na tu<strong>na</strong>liweka katika matumbo <strong>ya</strong> kizazi mpaka muda uliowekwa wa<br />
kuzaliwa mtoto. Kisha tu<strong>na</strong>watoa hali <strong>ya</strong> kuwa mtoto mchanga kisha<br />
mfikie kukomaa kwenu.<br />
81
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Kukomaa ni kukamilika mtu nguvu za kimwili <strong>na</strong> kiakili.<br />
Na wapo miongoni mwenu wa<strong>na</strong>okufa kabla <strong>ya</strong> kukomaa au baada <strong>ya</strong><br />
kukomaa kabla <strong>ya</strong> uzee <strong>na</strong> umri mba<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Na wapo miongoni mwenu wanorudishwa kwenye umri wa unyonge<br />
kabisa hata asijue kitu baada <strong>ya</strong> kuwa a<strong>na</strong>kijua.<br />
Ni uzee <strong>na</strong> ukongwe, udhaifu wa kimwili, kiakili <strong>na</strong> kumbukumbu.<br />
I<strong>na</strong>podhoofika akili matamanio <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>chukua <strong>na</strong>fasi <strong>na</strong> kuzidi kufan<strong>ya</strong><br />
mambo <strong>ya</strong> kipuuzi.<br />
Mabadiliko ha<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kukua kwa bi<strong>na</strong>damu, kutoka hali duni hadi hali <strong>ya</strong><br />
juu; kutoka mchanga hadi manii, kisha pande la damu, la n<strong>ya</strong>ma, utoto hadi<br />
kukomaa, <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>fahamisha waziwazi kwamba bi<strong>na</strong>damu a<strong>na</strong> nguvu <strong>na</strong><br />
maandalizi <strong>ya</strong>takayompeleka kwenye ukamilifu <strong>na</strong> ubora, ikiwa hakutakuwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> vizuizi v<strong>ya</strong> kuzuia kufikia lengo hili.<br />
Na u<strong>na</strong>io<strong>na</strong> ardhi imekufa, lakini tu<strong>na</strong>po<strong>ya</strong>teremsha maji juu <strong>ya</strong>ke,<br />
husisimka <strong>na</strong> kututumka <strong>na</strong> kumea kila ai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> mimea mizuri.<br />
Maji <strong>ya</strong>kishuka kwenye ardhi iliyokufa hutaharaki <strong>na</strong> kupumua kwa uhai,<br />
kisha i<strong>na</strong>toa ai<strong>na</strong> kwa ai<strong>na</strong> za mimea i<strong>na</strong>yovutia macho <strong>na</strong> yenye ladha kwa<br />
walaji.<br />
Haku<strong>na</strong> mwenye shaka kwamba ardhi ni maandalizi <strong>ya</strong> kuukabili uhai,<br />
lakini mpaka kwa idhini <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu Mtukufu. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu kila<br />
kitu ki<strong>na</strong>ishia kwenye kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke ‘kuwa <strong>na</strong> ki<strong>na</strong>kuwa’ Baadhi <strong>ya</strong> masufi<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>sema: Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> ardhi iliyokufa ni ujinga, maji ni elimu <strong>na</strong> ai<strong>na</strong><br />
mbalimbali za mimea ni sifa za ukamilifu za Mwenyezi Mungu.<br />
Hayo ni kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni haki <strong>na</strong> kwamba<br />
hakika yeye ndiye Mwenye kuhuisha wafu <strong>na</strong> kwamba hakika Yeye ni<br />
82
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Muweza wa kila kitu <strong>na</strong> kwamba saa itakuja hapa<strong>na</strong> shaka kwa hilo<br />
<strong>na</strong> kwamba Mwenyezi Mungu atawafufua walio makaburini.<br />
Hayo ni ishara <strong>ya</strong> mambo <strong>ya</strong>livyo. Maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kuwa Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
haki ni kwamba hukumu <strong>na</strong> ufalme ni wake yeye peke <strong>ya</strong>ke bila <strong>ya</strong><br />
kushirikia<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> yeyote <strong>na</strong> kwamba haku<strong>na</strong> kupatika<strong>na</strong> isipokuwa kutoka<strong>na</strong><br />
<strong>na</strong> yeye.<br />
Hiyo ikiwa <strong>na</strong> maa<strong>na</strong> kwamba yeye ndiye mwanzishaji <strong>na</strong> mrudishaji <strong>na</strong><br />
ufufuo utakuwako tu kama ulivyokuwako uumbaji; bali huo uumbaji ni<br />
nyenzo <strong>na</strong> njia <strong>ya</strong> kufikia ufufuo ambao ndio lengo la malengo yote. Kwa<br />
<strong>saba</strong>bu mtu a<strong>na</strong>rejea kwa muumba wake kuhisabiwa <strong>na</strong> kulipwa <strong>na</strong> pia<br />
hapo ndio pa kubakia, lakini kule kuumbwa kwa kwanza kuliisha. Kwisha<br />
ni nyenzo <strong>ya</strong> kubakia.<br />
Hapa ndio tu<strong>na</strong>kuta tafsiri <strong>ya</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu:<br />
“Na sikuumba majini <strong>na</strong> watu ila waniabudu.” (51: 56).<br />
Yametangulia maelezo <strong>ya</strong> ufufuo katika A<strong>ya</strong> kadhaa; miongoni mwazo ni:<br />
Juz. 1 (2:28-29) kifungu cha ‘Ufufuo,’ Juz. 5 (4: 85-87) kifungu cha ‘Njia<br />
mabalimbali za kuthibitisha marejeo (ufufuo) <strong>na</strong> Juz. 13 (13: 5-7) kifungu<br />
cha ‘Wa<strong>na</strong>oamini maada <strong>na</strong> maisha baada <strong>ya</strong> mauti.’<br />
83
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
8. Na katika watu wapo wa<strong>na</strong>ojadilia<strong>na</strong><br />
juu <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu bila <strong>ya</strong> ilimu wala<br />
uongufu wala Kitabu chenye<br />
nuru.<br />
9. A<strong>na</strong>yegeuza shingo <strong>ya</strong>ke ili<br />
awapoteze watu <strong>na</strong> njia <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu. Duniani<br />
atapata hiza<strong>ya</strong> <strong>na</strong> siku <strong>ya</strong><br />
Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma tutamuonjesha<br />
adhabu <strong>ya</strong> kuungua.<br />
10. Hayo ni kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> iliyotanguliza<br />
mikono <strong>ya</strong>ko <strong>na</strong><br />
kwamba Mwenyezi Mungu si<br />
mwenye kuwadhulumu waja.<br />
11. Na katika watu wapo<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>omwabudu Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu ukingoni. Ikimfika<br />
kheri hutulia kwayo, <strong>na</strong><br />
ukimfikia msukosuko<br />
hugeuza uso wake. Amepata<br />
hasara <strong>ya</strong> dunia <strong>na</strong> Akhera;<br />
hiyo ndiyo hasara iliyo wazi.<br />
84
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
12. A<strong>na</strong>omba, badala <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu, kile kisichomdhuru<br />
wala kumnufaisha.<br />
Huko ndiko kupotelea<br />
mbali.<br />
13. A<strong>na</strong>muomba yule ambaye<br />
hakika dhara iko karibu zaidi<br />
kuliko <strong>na</strong>fuu <strong>ya</strong>ke. Hakika ni<br />
mlinzi mba<strong>ya</strong> <strong>na</strong> ni rafiki<br />
mba<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
14. Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
atawaingiza wale walioamini<br />
<strong>na</strong> wakatenda mema katika<br />
bustani zipitazo mito chini<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke. Hakika Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu hufan<strong>ya</strong> a<strong>ya</strong>takayo.<br />
SABABU YA MAARIFA KATIKA AYA MOJA<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 8 – 14<br />
MAANA<br />
Na katika watu wapo wa<strong>na</strong>ojadilia<strong>na</strong> juu <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu bila <strong>ya</strong><br />
ilimu wala uongufu wala Kitabu chenye nuru.<br />
85
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Wewe u<strong>na</strong>o<strong>na</strong> hii ndiyo haki <strong>na</strong> ile ni batili, lakini ni lipi lililokujulisha<br />
kwamba rai <strong>ya</strong>ko ni sahihi <strong>na</strong> salama? U<strong>na</strong> dhama<strong>na</strong> gani <strong>ya</strong> usahihi huo?<br />
I<strong>na</strong>wezekeka<strong>na</strong> kuwa ile u<strong>na</strong>yoio<strong>na</strong> ni haki kumbe ni batili <strong>na</strong> ile u<strong>na</strong>yoio<strong>na</strong><br />
ni batili kumbe ni haki.<br />
Haku<strong>na</strong> njia <strong>ya</strong> kujua maarifa sahihi isipokuwa kwa kurejea kwenye chimbuko<br />
lake <strong>na</strong> <strong>saba</strong>bu iliyotoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong>yo. Ikiwa <strong>saba</strong>bu ni sahihi basi maarifa<br />
<strong>na</strong>yo <strong>ya</strong>takuwa sahihi; vinginevyo <strong>ya</strong>takuwa batili. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu tawi li<strong>na</strong>fuata<br />
shi<strong>na</strong>.<br />
Swali li<strong>na</strong>rudi te<strong>na</strong>: Je, ni ipi hiyo <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> maarifa sahihi? Utaitambuaje?<br />
Jamaa katika wa<strong>na</strong>falsafa wa<strong>na</strong>sema kuwa <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> maarifa sahihi<br />
i<strong>na</strong>kuwa kwenye majaribio <strong>ya</strong> hisia tu. Wengine wakasema ni akili; <strong>na</strong><br />
hisia ni vyombo tu. Ama Qur’an, katika A<strong>ya</strong> tu<strong>na</strong>yoifasiri, imetaja <strong>saba</strong>bu<br />
tatu za maarifa: Kwanza ni majaribio <strong>ya</strong> hisi<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong>liyotajwa kwa neno<br />
‘ilimu’ Ya pili ni akili iliyoitwa ‘Uongofu’ Ya tatu ni Wahyi iliyokusudiwa<br />
kwenye neno ‘Kitabu chenye nuru’.<br />
Majaribo <strong>ya</strong> hisia <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>kuwa ni <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> kujua vitu v<strong>ya</strong> kimaada tu. Kwa<br />
<strong>saba</strong>bu ndivyo vi<strong>na</strong>vyoweza kuhisiwa <strong>na</strong> kufanyiwa majaribio. Te<strong>na</strong><br />
majaribio ha<strong>ya</strong> huwa <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>hitajia akili, kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu hisia haziwezi kutambua<br />
kitu ila kwa msaada wa akili.<br />
Ni akili pekee ndiyo i<strong>na</strong>yoweza kujua <strong>na</strong> kuthibitisha kuweko Mungu.<br />
Ama utume u<strong>na</strong>thibitika kwa akili <strong>na</strong> kwa miujiza. Ukitaka ibara <strong>ya</strong> ndani<br />
zaidi sema: Utume u<strong>na</strong>thibitika kwa miujiza i<strong>na</strong>yothibitishwa <strong>na</strong> akili <strong>na</strong><br />
kuikubali kuwa imetoka mbinguni sio ardhini.<br />
Ama wahyi ni <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> kujua kila uliyokuja <strong>na</strong>yo. Wahyi ndio njia pekee<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kujua mambo <strong>ya</strong> ghaibu; kama majini, Malaika, Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma, <strong>na</strong>m<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> hisabu<br />
<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> malipo kwenye ufufuo n.k.<br />
86
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
A<strong>na</strong>yegeuza shingo <strong>ya</strong>ke ili awapoteze watu <strong>na</strong> njia <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu. Duniani atapata hiza<strong>ya</strong>, <strong>na</strong> siku <strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma tutamuonjesha<br />
adhabu <strong>ya</strong> kuungua.<br />
Kugeuza shingo ni ki<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong> cha kiburi.<br />
Yeye hajui kitu, a<strong>na</strong>jadili kuhusu Mungu bila <strong>ya</strong> ujuzi, a<strong>na</strong> kiburi ki<strong>na</strong>chomuhadaa<br />
<strong>na</strong> ni mpotevu <strong>na</strong> mpotezaji. Haku<strong>na</strong> malipo <strong>ya</strong> wajinga weneye<br />
kiburi isipokuwa kudharaulika <strong>na</strong> kupuuzwa <strong>na</strong> watu <strong>na</strong> adhabu kali<br />
kutoka kwa Mwenyezi Mungu.<br />
Hayo ni kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> iliyotanguliza mikono <strong>ya</strong>ko <strong>na</strong> kwamba Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu si mwenye kuwadhulumu waja. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu amewaondolea udhuru<br />
kwa kuwapa akili, kuwapelekea mitume <strong>na</strong> akateremsha vitabu.<br />
Na katika watu wapo wa<strong>na</strong>omwabudu Mwenyezi Mungu ukingoni.<br />
Katika A<strong>ya</strong> iliyotangulia Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) amemtaja a<strong>na</strong>yemkufuru<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> kumjadili bila <strong>ya</strong> elimu. Hapa a<strong>na</strong>mtaja yule<br />
a<strong>na</strong>yemwabudu Mwenyezi Mungu ukingoni.<br />
Wafasiri wametofautia<strong>na</strong> katika makusudio <strong>ya</strong> kabudu ukingoni. Ku<strong>na</strong><br />
waliosema kuwa ni kumwabudu Mwenyezi Mungu pamoja <strong>na</strong> shaka katika<br />
dini. Wengine wakasema ni kumwabudu kwa ulimi tu sio kwa moyo <strong>na</strong><br />
kauli nyingine.<br />
Haku<strong>na</strong> haja <strong>ya</strong> kutofautia<strong>na</strong> huku wakati Mwenyezi Mungu amekwisha<br />
mbainisha a<strong>na</strong>yemwabudu ukingoni kwa kusema: Ikimfika kheri hutulia<br />
kwayo <strong>na</strong> ukimfikia msukosuko hugeuza uso wake.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> kheri hapa ni mambo <strong>ya</strong> kufurahisha <strong>na</strong> misukosuko ni madhara.<br />
Kutulia ni kuwa <strong>na</strong> raha <strong>na</strong> kuendelea <strong>na</strong> ibada, <strong>na</strong> kugeuza uso ni<br />
kurtadi dini. Maa<strong>na</strong> ni kuwa a<strong>na</strong>yemwabudu Mwenyezi Mungu ukingoni<br />
87
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
ni yule a<strong>na</strong>yeweka sharti kwa ibada <strong>ya</strong>ke, mpaka apate kitu ndio a<strong>na</strong>abudu<br />
vinginevyo humkufuru Mungu, vitabu v<strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> mitume <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Na yoyote mwenye kumkufuru basi malipo <strong>ya</strong>ke ni Jahan<strong>na</strong>m <strong>na</strong> ni<br />
mwisho mba<strong>ya</strong>. Amepata hasara <strong>ya</strong> dunia <strong>na</strong> Akhera; hiyo ndiyo<br />
hasara iliyo wazi.<br />
Amepata hasara <strong>ya</strong> nyumba mbili: ambapo mwanzo ni balaa <strong>na</strong> madhara.<br />
Pili, atafika kwa Mola wake akiwa a<strong>na</strong>mkufuru. Ku<strong>na</strong> hasara kubwa zaidi<br />
<strong>ya</strong> ufukara duniani <strong>na</strong> adhabu akhera.<br />
Ufafanuzi zaidi wa A<strong>ya</strong> hii ni riwa<strong>ya</strong> i<strong>na</strong>yosema kwamba baadhi <strong>ya</strong><br />
mabedui walikuwa wakifika kwa Mtume (s.a.w.) wakihama kutoka<br />
ubeduini kwao. Basi mmoja wao akiwa <strong>na</strong> mali nyingi huswali <strong>na</strong> kufunga.<br />
Akipatwa <strong>na</strong> masaibu au akicheleweshewa sadaka basi huritadi.<br />
Nime<strong>ya</strong>shuhudia <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>yofa<strong>na</strong><strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> ha<strong>ya</strong> nilipokuwa nikiishi <strong>na</strong> baadhi <strong>ya</strong><br />
wa<strong>na</strong>kijiji.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> hayo, hakika mumin wa kweli ni yule a<strong>na</strong>yemfanyia ikhlasi<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> kumtegemea katika hali zote; a<strong>na</strong>kuwa <strong>na</strong> subira<br />
wakati wa shida <strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>shukuru wakati wa raha.<br />
Katika Nahjul balagha ku<strong>na</strong> maelezo ha<strong>ya</strong>: “Haiwi kweli imani <strong>ya</strong> mja<br />
mpaka <strong>ya</strong>we <strong>ya</strong>liyo mikononi mwa Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong>tegemea zaidi<br />
kuliko <strong>ya</strong>liyo mikononi mwake.”<br />
A<strong>na</strong>omba, badala <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu, kile kisichomdhuru wala<br />
kumnufaisha. Huko ndiko kupotelea mbali.<br />
Maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> hii <strong>ya</strong>metangulia kwenye A<strong>ya</strong> nyingi, yenyewe pia iko wazi.<br />
A<strong>na</strong>muomba yule ambaye hakika dhara iko karibu zaidi kuliko <strong>na</strong>fuu<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke. Hakika ni mlinzi mba<strong>ya</strong> <strong>na</strong> ni rafiki mba<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
88
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
U<strong>na</strong>weza kuuliza kuwa katika A<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kwanza Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
amekanusha kuweko manufaa <strong>na</strong> madhara kwa <strong>ya</strong>le wa<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>abudu<br />
washiriki<strong>na</strong>, kisha katika A<strong>ya</strong> hii a<strong>na</strong>thibitisha kuweko manufaa <strong>ya</strong> mbali<br />
<strong>na</strong> madhara <strong>ya</strong> karibu. Je, ku<strong>na</strong> wajihi gani bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> mbili hizi?<br />
Jibu: makusudio <strong>ya</strong> chenye kuabudia katika A<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kwanza ni mawe;<br />
ha<strong>ya</strong>nufaishi wala ha<strong>ya</strong>dhuru. Na makusudio katika A<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong> pili ni kuwatii<br />
viongozi mataghuti <strong>na</strong> kuwataka usaidizi kwa kukusudia kupata faida <strong>na</strong><br />
manufaa, <strong>na</strong> ukubwa wa manufaa <strong>ya</strong> duniani si chochote kulinganisha <strong>na</strong><br />
ghadhabu za Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> adhabu <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Kwa maneno mengine ni kwamba wao wa<strong>na</strong>mtii kiumbe kwa kumuasi<br />
muumba kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> manufaa <strong>ya</strong> dunia, hawajui kwamba adhabu <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ni kali <strong>na</strong> kubwa zaidi.<br />
Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu atawaingiza wale walioamini <strong>na</strong> wakatenda<br />
mema katika bustani zipitazo mito chini <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> iko wazi <strong>na</strong> pia imekwishatangulia katika Juz. 1 (2: 25).<br />
Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu hufan<strong>ya</strong> a<strong>ya</strong>takayo katika kuwapa thawabu<br />
wema <strong>na</strong> kuwaadhibu waovu. Na amekwishapitisha kuwa waliofan<strong>ya</strong><br />
mema atawalipa mema <strong>na</strong> waba<strong>ya</strong> atawalipa uba<strong>ya</strong> kuto<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> waliyo<strong>ya</strong>fan<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
89
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
15. A<strong>na</strong>yedhani kwamba<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu hatamnusuru<br />
katika dunia <strong>na</strong><br />
Akhera, basi <strong>na</strong> afunge<br />
kamba mbinguni kisha<br />
aikate, aone je, hila <strong>ya</strong>ke<br />
itaondoa <strong>ya</strong>le <strong>ya</strong>liyomghadhabisha?<br />
16. Na <strong>na</strong>m<strong>na</strong> hiyo tumeiteremsha<br />
kuwa ni A<strong>ya</strong> zilizo<br />
wazi <strong>na</strong> kwamba Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu humuongoza a<strong>na</strong>yetaka.<br />
17. Hakika wale ambao<br />
wameamini <strong>na</strong> ambao ni<br />
ma<strong>ya</strong>hudi <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>saba</strong>i <strong>na</strong><br />
wa<strong>na</strong>swara <strong>na</strong> wamajusi <strong>na</strong><br />
wale washirikishao, hakika<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu atawapambanua<br />
siku <strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma.<br />
Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
shahidi juu <strong>ya</strong> kila kitu.<br />
90
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
18. Je huoni kuwa vi<strong>na</strong>msujudia<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu vilivyo<br />
mbinguni <strong>na</strong> vilivyo ardhini<br />
<strong>na</strong> jua <strong>na</strong> mwezi <strong>na</strong> nyota <strong>na</strong><br />
milima <strong>na</strong> miti <strong>na</strong> wan<strong>ya</strong>ma<br />
<strong>na</strong> wengi miongoni mwa<br />
watu. Na wengi imewastahili<br />
adhabu. Na a<strong>na</strong>yetwezwa <strong>na</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ha<strong>na</strong> wa<br />
kumheshimu. Hakika<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu hutenda<br />
apendayo.<br />
AJINYONGE<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 15 -18<br />
LUGHA<br />
Wengi wamesema kuwa makusudio <strong>ya</strong> mbingu hapa ni dari <strong>ya</strong> nyumba,<br />
kukata ni kujinyonga <strong>na</strong> hila <strong>ya</strong>ke ni huko kujinyonga kwake. Kwa hiyo<br />
maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>takuwa: A<strong>na</strong>yedhani kwamba Mwenyezi Mungu hatamnusuru<br />
katika dunia <strong>na</strong> Akhera, basi <strong>na</strong> afunge kitanzi ajinyonge aone je huko<br />
kujinyonga kutamuondolea ghadhabu <strong>ya</strong>ke?<br />
MAANA<br />
Wafasiri wengi wamesema kuwa dhamiri <strong>ya</strong> ‘hawatamnusuru’ i<strong>na</strong>mrudia<br />
Muhammad (s.a.w.) <strong>na</strong> maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>we: A<strong>na</strong>yedhani katika washiriki<strong>na</strong> kuwa<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu hatamnusuru Mtume wake Muhammad (s.a.w.), basi <strong>na</strong><br />
91
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
amnyonge aone kama Mwenyezi Mungu hatamnusuru Mtume wake.<br />
Lakini dhahiri <strong>ya</strong> mfumo wa A<strong>ya</strong> i<strong>na</strong>onyesha kuwa dhamiri i<strong>na</strong>mrudia<br />
huyo a<strong>na</strong>yedhani, kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu Muhammad (s.a.w.) hakutajwa katika A<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Na maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>kuwa: Ambaye ameshukiwa <strong>na</strong> balaa <strong>na</strong> akachukia kadha<br />
<strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> kadari <strong>ya</strong>ke, akakata tamaa kwamba Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu atamsaidia duniani <strong>na</strong> kumpa thawabu akhera kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> kuvumilia<br />
kwake, atakayekuwa hivyo basi hatakuwa <strong>na</strong> la kufan<strong>ya</strong> isipokuwa<br />
kujinyonga kwa kujifunga kamba kwenye dari <strong>ya</strong> nyumba <strong>ya</strong>ke; kisha aangalie<br />
je, hilo ndilo suluhisho?<br />
Mwenye akili a<strong>na</strong>potokewa <strong>na</strong> balaa, hufan<strong>ya</strong> juhudi <strong>na</strong> bidii kuiondoa<br />
huku akitaka msaada kwa Mwenyezi Mungu, akifaulu ni sawa, la sivyo<br />
humwachia Mwenyezi Mungu mambo yote huku akingoja fursa.<br />
Na <strong>na</strong>m<strong>na</strong> hiyo tumeiteremsha kuwa ni A<strong>ya</strong> zilizo wazi <strong>na</strong> kwamba<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu humuongoza a<strong>na</strong>yetaka.<br />
Dhamiri katika iliyoteremshwa i<strong>na</strong>rudia Qur’an. Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.)<br />
humwongoza a<strong>na</strong>yetaka kuongoka kwa Kitabu chake <strong>na</strong> humwongoza<br />
kwenye wema wa nyumba mbili yule a<strong>na</strong>yetafuta mwongozo kwake <strong>na</strong><br />
kwa Mtume wake. Na mwenye kutafuta upotevu <strong>na</strong> ufisadi ataipata njia<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke kwa wafisadi <strong>na</strong> wapotevu.<br />
Hakika wale ambao wameamini <strong>na</strong> ambao ni ma<strong>ya</strong>hudi <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>saba</strong>i <strong>na</strong><br />
wa<strong>na</strong>swara <strong>na</strong> wamajusi <strong>na</strong> wale washirikishao, hakika Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu atawapambanua siku <strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma. Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
shahidi juu <strong>ya</strong> kila kitu.<br />
Wa<strong>saba</strong>i wa<strong>na</strong>mwamini Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> siku <strong>ya</strong> mwisho, lakini<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>amini kuwa baadhi <strong>ya</strong> nyota zi<strong>na</strong> athari katika kheri <strong>na</strong> shari, wamajusi<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>abudu moto kwa kusema kuwa kheri i<strong>na</strong>toka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> nuru <strong>na</strong> shari<br />
i<strong>na</strong>toka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> giza <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>swara ni wakristo.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong>jua makundi yote ha<strong>ya</strong> sita <strong>na</strong> ata<strong>ya</strong>pambanua<br />
kesho siku <strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma <strong>na</strong> kumlipa kila mmoja kwa vile alivyofan<strong>ya</strong>. Kafiri<br />
92
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
atamwingiza motoni <strong>na</strong> mumin atamwingiza Peponi. Umetangulia mfano<br />
wa A<strong>ya</strong> hii katika Juz. 1 (2: 117).<br />
Je huoni kuwa vi<strong>na</strong>msujudia Mwenyezi Mungu vilivyo mbinguni <strong>na</strong><br />
vilivyo ardhini <strong>na</strong> jua <strong>na</strong> mwezi <strong>na</strong> nyota <strong>na</strong> milima <strong>na</strong> miti <strong>na</strong> wan<strong>ya</strong>ma.<br />
Wamesema jamaa katika wafasiri kwamba makusudio <strong>ya</strong> kusujudi wan<strong>ya</strong>ma<br />
mimea n.k. Ni kutii amri <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> kwamba yeye a<strong>na</strong>wafanyia vile<br />
atakavyo.<br />
Katika Juz. 15 (17: 44) tumeeleza kuwa makusudio <strong>ya</strong> kusujudi vitu<br />
visivyo <strong>na</strong> harakati, miti <strong>na</strong> mimea ni kule kufahamisha kwake kuweko<br />
muumba wake <strong>na</strong> utukufu wake.<br />
Mulla Sadra katika kitabu <strong>Al</strong>-Asfar a<strong>na</strong>sema: “Vitu vyote vi<strong>na</strong> akili, vi<strong>na</strong>mfahamu<br />
Mola wake <strong>na</strong> kumjua muumba wake, vi<strong>na</strong>sikia maneno <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong><br />
kufuata amri <strong>ya</strong>ke”<br />
Ha<strong>ya</strong> ha<strong>ya</strong>ko mbali, akili i<strong>na</strong>kubali <strong>na</strong> dhahiri <strong>ya</strong> nukuu i<strong>na</strong>lithibitisha.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu Mtukufu a<strong>na</strong>sema:<br />
“Na hapa<strong>na</strong> kila kitu ila ki<strong>na</strong>mtakasa kwa sifa zake, lakini nyinyi hamfahamu<br />
kutakasa kwake.” Juz. 15 (17:44).<br />
Sa<strong>ya</strong>nsi itagundua hakika hii hivi karibuni au baadaye.<br />
Na wengi miongoni mwa watu wa<strong>na</strong>mwamini <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>msujudia. Na<br />
wengi miongoni mwao imewastahili adhabu. Hao ni wale waliomkufuru<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu wa<strong>na</strong>owadharau wale wa<strong>na</strong>omwamini Mungu. Ilikuwa<br />
i<strong>na</strong>faa kwa mwenye kitabu <strong>Al</strong>-Asfar, awavue wa<strong>na</strong>omka<strong>na</strong> Mungu katika<br />
viumbe.<br />
93
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Na a<strong>na</strong>yetwezwa <strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu ha<strong>na</strong> wa kumheshimu.<br />
Kabisa! Haku<strong>na</strong> wa kumuinua aliyeangushwa <strong>na</strong> kudhalilishwa <strong>na</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu, wala haku<strong>na</strong> wa kumdhalilisha aliyetukuzwa <strong>na</strong> kuenziwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu, <strong>na</strong> haku<strong>na</strong> utukufu mbele <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
ila kwa wenye takua.<br />
Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu hutenda apendayo kuwatukuza wema <strong>na</strong><br />
kuwatweza wapotevu <strong>na</strong> wafisadi.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> hayo. Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong> desturi katika viumbe v<strong>ya</strong>ke<br />
haiachi; <strong>na</strong>yo ni kuwa mwenye kufuata nji <strong>ya</strong> maangamizi ataangamia, <strong>na</strong><br />
mwenye kufuata njia <strong>ya</strong> usalama atasalimika. Njia <strong>ya</strong> usalama mbele <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ni imani <strong>ya</strong> kweli <strong>na</strong> matendo mema; <strong>na</strong> njia <strong>ya</strong> kufedheheka<br />
<strong>na</strong> kupuuzwa ni u<strong>na</strong>fiki <strong>na</strong> ufisadi katika ardhi.<br />
19. Hawa mahasimu wawili<br />
waliohasimia<strong>na</strong> kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mola wao. Basi waliokufuru<br />
watakatiwa nguo za moto <strong>na</strong><br />
<strong>ya</strong>tamiminwa juu <strong>ya</strong> vichwa<br />
v<strong>ya</strong>o maji <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>yochemka.<br />
20. Kwayo vitayeyushwa vilivyo<br />
matumboni mwao <strong>na</strong> ngozi.<br />
21. Na <strong>ya</strong>takuwako makomeo <strong>ya</strong><br />
chuma kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong>o.<br />
94
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
22. Kila wa<strong>na</strong>potaka kutoka<br />
humo kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> uchungu<br />
watarudishwa humo<br />
humo; <strong>na</strong> onjeni adhabu <strong>ya</strong><br />
kuungua.<br />
23. Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
atawaingiza walioamini <strong>na</strong><br />
wakatenda mema katika bustani<br />
zipitiwazo <strong>na</strong> mito chini<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke. Watapambwa humo<br />
kwa vikuku v<strong>ya</strong> dhahabu <strong>na</strong><br />
lulu <strong>na</strong> mavazi <strong>ya</strong>o humo ni<br />
hariri.<br />
24. Na wataongozwa kwenye<br />
maneno mazuri <strong>na</strong> kuongozwa<br />
kwenye njia <strong>ya</strong><br />
mwenye kuhimidiwa.<br />
25. Hakika wale waliokufuru <strong>na</strong><br />
wakawazuilia njia <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> Msikiti<br />
mtakatifu ambao tumeufan<strong>ya</strong><br />
kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> watu wote sawa<br />
95
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
sawa, kwa wakaao humo <strong>na</strong><br />
wageni. Na kila atakayefan<strong>ya</strong><br />
upotofu humo kwa dhulma<br />
tutamwonjesha adhabu chungu.<br />
MAHASIMU WAWILI<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 19 - 25<br />
MAANA<br />
Hawa mahasimu wawili waliohasimia<strong>na</strong> kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> Mola wao.<br />
Ku<strong>na</strong> maelezo katika Tafsir At-Tabari kwamba Abu dharr alikuwa akiapa<br />
kwa Mwenyezi Mungu kwamba A<strong>ya</strong> hii imeshuka kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> watu sita<br />
katika makuraishi; watatu miongoni mwao ni waumini <strong>na</strong>o ni Hamza bin<br />
Abdul-Muttalib, <strong>Al</strong>i bin Abu Twalib <strong>na</strong> Ubayda bin <strong>Al</strong>-Harith. Na watatu<br />
ni katika washiriki<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong>o ni: Utba <strong>na</strong> Shayba, watoto wa Rabia <strong>na</strong> Walid<br />
bin Utba. Uhasama bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>o ulikuwa katika vita v<strong>ya</strong> Badr walipobarizia<strong>na</strong>;<br />
<strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu akawapa nusra waumini kuwashinda<br />
washiriki<strong>na</strong>.<br />
Jamaa katika wafasiri wamesema kwamba makusudio <strong>ya</strong> waliohasimia<strong>na</strong><br />
ni kikundi cha waumini <strong>na</strong> kikundi cha makafiri ambao ni ma<strong>ya</strong>hudi,<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>swara, wa<strong>saba</strong>i, majusi <strong>na</strong> washiriki<strong>na</strong>. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu wote hao<br />
wametajwa katika A<strong>ya</strong> iliyotangulia <strong>na</strong> kila kundi li<strong>na</strong>sema li<strong>na</strong> haki kuliko<br />
jingine.<br />
Vyovyvote iwavyo ni kwamba uhasama katika dini u<strong>na</strong>tokea bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong><br />
wa<strong>na</strong>oamini.<br />
96
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Basi waliokufuru watakatiwa nguo za moto <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>tamiminwa juu <strong>ya</strong><br />
vichwa v<strong>ya</strong>o maji <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>yochemka. Kwayo vitayeyushwa vilivyo<br />
matumboni mwao <strong>na</strong> ngozi. Na <strong>ya</strong>takuwako makomeo <strong>ya</strong> chuma kwa<br />
ajili <strong>ya</strong>o. Kila wa<strong>na</strong>potaka kutoka humo kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> uchungu<br />
watarudishwa humo humo, <strong>na</strong> onjeni adhabu <strong>ya</strong> kuungua.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu kuashiria uhasama wa waumini <strong>na</strong> makafiri<br />
a<strong>na</strong>taja kwamba mwenye kumwamini Mwenyezi Mungu mwisho wake ni<br />
Peponi <strong>na</strong> mwenye kumkufuru mwisho wake ni Jahan<strong>na</strong>m, mwisho mba<strong>ya</strong><br />
kabisa. Na kwamba watu wake watavaa kivazi cha moto <strong>na</strong> watamiminiwa<br />
maji <strong>ya</strong> moto ambayo <strong>ya</strong>tayeyusha mafuta, n<strong>ya</strong>ma matumbo <strong>na</strong> ngozi. Pia<br />
nguzo za chuma zitakuwa vichwani mwao kuwazuia kutoka kila wa<strong>na</strong>pojaribu<br />
kukimbia. I<strong>na</strong>wezeke<strong>na</strong> kukimbia hukumu <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong><br />
matakwa <strong>ya</strong>ke?<br />
Umepita mfano wake katika Juz. 13 (14: 49 – 50) kifungu cha ‘Jahan<strong>na</strong>m<br />
<strong>na</strong> silaha za maangamizi’<br />
Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu atawaingiza walioamini <strong>na</strong> wakatenda<br />
mema katika bustani zipitiwazo <strong>na</strong> mito chini <strong>ya</strong>ke. Watapambwa<br />
humo kwa vikuku v<strong>ya</strong> dhahabu <strong>na</strong> lulu <strong>na</strong> mavazi <strong>ya</strong>o humo ni hariri.<br />
Makafiri watakuwa <strong>na</strong> mavazi <strong>ya</strong> moto, makomeo <strong>ya</strong> chuma, maji <strong>ya</strong> moto<br />
<strong>na</strong> waumini wenye ikhlasi watapata pepo yenye neema, mito yenye kinywaji<br />
cha ladha, nguo za hariri <strong>na</strong> vipambo v<strong>ya</strong> dhahabu <strong>na</strong> lulu.<br />
Na wataongozwa kwenye maneno mazuri.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu kuashiria kwenye chakula <strong>na</strong> kinywaji chao,<br />
a<strong>na</strong>taja kauli zao ambazo ni nzuri; mfano <strong>Al</strong>hamdulillah.<br />
Na kuongozwa kwenye njia <strong>ya</strong> mwenye kuhimidiwa.<br />
Hiyo ni njia yenye kunyooka waliyoifuata katika maisha <strong>ya</strong> dunia,<br />
ikawapeleka kwenye neema <strong>ya</strong> Akhera.<br />
97
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Hakika wale waliokufuru <strong>na</strong> wakawazuilia njia <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
<strong>na</strong> Msikiti mtakatifu ambao tumeufan<strong>ya</strong> kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> watu wote sawasawa,<br />
kwa wakaao humo <strong>na</strong> wageni.<br />
Washiriki<strong>na</strong> wa kikuraishi walikuwa wakiwazuilia watu kuiingia kwenye<br />
Uislamu, kuhiji <strong>na</strong> kufan<strong>ya</strong> umra kwenye nyumba <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
ambayo ameifan<strong>ya</strong> ni mahali pa kuendewa <strong>na</strong> watu <strong>na</strong> mahali pa amani.<br />
Umepita mfano wake katika Juz. 1 (2: 125).<br />
Na kila atakayefan<strong>ya</strong> upotofu humo kwa dhulma tutamwonjesha<br />
adhabu chungu.<br />
Yaani atakayeacha <strong>ya</strong>le aliyo<strong>ya</strong>amrisha Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> akamfanyia<br />
uovu a<strong>na</strong>yeikusudia nyumba <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu tukufu, basi Mungu<br />
atamwadhibu adhabu kubwa.<br />
26. Na tulipomwekea Ibrahim<br />
mahala penye ile nyumba<br />
kwamba usinishirikishe <strong>na</strong><br />
chochote <strong>na</strong> uitwaharishe<br />
nyumba <strong>ya</strong>ngu kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong><br />
wanozunguka <strong>na</strong> wakaazi <strong>na</strong><br />
wa<strong>na</strong>orukui <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>osujudi.<br />
27. Na watangazie watu Hijja;<br />
watakujia kwa miguu <strong>na</strong> juu<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kila mn<strong>ya</strong>ma aliyekonda<br />
kutoka kila njia <strong>ya</strong> mbali.<br />
98
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
28. Ili washuhudie manufaa <strong>ya</strong>o<br />
<strong>na</strong> walitaje ji<strong>na</strong> la Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu katika siku maalum<br />
juu <strong>ya</strong> wan<strong>ya</strong>ma hawa<br />
aliowaruzuku.<br />
29. Basi kuleni katika hao <strong>na</strong><br />
mumlishe mwenye shida aliye<br />
fukara, kisha wajisafishe taka<br />
zao <strong>na</strong> watimize <strong>na</strong>dhiri zao<br />
<strong>na</strong> waizunguke sa<strong>na</strong> nyumba<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kale.<br />
ITWAHARISHE NYUMBA YANGU<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 26 -29<br />
MAANA<br />
Na tulipomwekea Ibrahim mahala penye ile nyumba kwamba usinishirikishe<br />
<strong>na</strong> chochote <strong>na</strong> uitwaharishe nyumba <strong>ya</strong>ngu kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong><br />
wanozunguka <strong>na</strong> wakaazi <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>orukui <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>osujudi.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> wakaazi ni wakaazi wa Makka <strong>na</strong> viunga v<strong>ya</strong>ke; <strong>na</strong><br />
wanorukui wakisujudi ni wa<strong>na</strong>oswali.<br />
Makuraishi walikuwa wakiabudu masa<strong>na</strong>mu <strong>na</strong> wakisimamia <strong>Al</strong>-Kaaba.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu kumtuma Muhammad (s.a.w.) walianza kuwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> uadui <strong>na</strong>ye <strong>na</strong> kila a<strong>na</strong>yemwamini, te<strong>na</strong> wakawazuilia waislamu kuizunguka<br />
(tawaf) <strong>na</strong> kuswali hapo; kama ilivyoelezwa kwenye A<strong>ya</strong> iliyotangu-<br />
99
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
lia. Pamoja <strong>na</strong> hayo Makuraishi walikuwa wakidai kwamba wako kwenye<br />
dini <strong>ya</strong> Ibrahim (a.s.).<br />
Ndio Mwenyezi Mungu akabatilisha madai <strong>ya</strong>o ha<strong>ya</strong>, kwamba yeye ndiye<br />
mwenye nyumba hiyo <strong>na</strong> alimpa wahyi kuwa aijenge <strong>na</strong> aifanye ni mahsusi<br />
kwa ibada <strong>ya</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>ompwekesha Mungu wa<strong>na</strong>okaa hapo <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>opita<br />
<strong>na</strong> pia kuwaweka mbali <strong>na</strong>yo washiriki<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> mizimu <strong>ya</strong>o.<br />
Ha<strong>ya</strong> ndio maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu ‘Na uitwaharishe nyumba<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ngu’ lakini makuraishi waliipindua A<strong>ya</strong>, wakaijaza masa<strong>na</strong>mu nyumba<br />
<strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu, wakaihalalishia washiriki<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> wafisadi <strong>na</strong><br />
wakawazulia <strong>na</strong>yo watu wa tawhid <strong>na</strong> wema.<br />
Na watangazie watu Hijja; watakujia kwa miguu <strong>na</strong> juu <strong>ya</strong> kila mn<strong>ya</strong>ma<br />
aliyekonda kutoka kila njia <strong>ya</strong> mbali.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu alimwamrisha kipenzi chake awaite watu kuhiji<br />
kwenye msikiti mtakatifu baada <strong>ya</strong> kusimamisha misingi <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> kutimia<br />
jengo. Akamwahidi kuwa watu watamwitikia <strong>na</strong> watamjia kwa kila hali;<br />
kutembea kwa miguu <strong>na</strong> kupanda ngamia au farasi waliokonda te<strong>na</strong> kutoka<br />
mbali, sikwambii karibu.<br />
Ili washuhudie manufaa <strong>ya</strong>o.<br />
Hijja ni ibada pekee i<strong>na</strong>yochangan<strong>ya</strong> manufaa <strong>ya</strong> kidini <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kidunia.<br />
Ama <strong>ya</strong> kidini ni kumtii Mwenyezi Mungu kwa kutekeleza faradhi <strong>ya</strong><br />
Hijja, kutubia <strong>na</strong> kutambua haiba <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> utukufu. Ibn <strong>Al</strong>-<br />
Arabi a<strong>na</strong>sema katika Kitabu Futuhatul- Makkiy<strong>ya</strong>: “Siku moja nilikuwa<br />
nikitufu <strong>Al</strong>-Kaaba nikaio<strong>na</strong> kama kwamba imen<strong>ya</strong>nyuka kutoka ardhini,<br />
wallah, ikaniambia maneno niliyo<strong>ya</strong>sikia: njoo uone nitakavyokufanyia,<br />
mara ngapi hadhi <strong>ya</strong>ngu u<strong>na</strong>iweka chini <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> bi<strong>na</strong>damu u<strong>na</strong>iinua juu?.<br />
Nasi tu<strong>na</strong>sema kwa uhakika: haku<strong>na</strong> yeyote a<strong>na</strong>yefan<strong>ya</strong> sa’yi au tawaf<br />
katika nyumba <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu kwa ikhlas ila atahisi ai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kitu<br />
kama hiki.<br />
100
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Na walitaje ji<strong>na</strong> la Mwenyezi Mungu katika siku maalum juu <strong>ya</strong><br />
wan<strong>ya</strong>ma howa aliowaruzuku, ambao ni ngamia ng’ombe <strong>na</strong> mbuzi <strong>na</strong><br />
kondoo.<br />
Kumtaja Mwenyezi Mungu kwenye wan<strong>ya</strong>ma ni ki<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong> cha kuchinja, kwa<br />
<strong>saba</strong>bu kusoma Bismillah ni wajibu katika kuchinja. Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> siku<br />
maalum ni siku za kuchinja katika Hijja, kama i<strong>na</strong>vyofahamisha A<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Mafakihi wametofautia<strong>na</strong> katika idadi <strong>ya</strong> siku hizo: Shia wamesema ni<br />
nne, mwanzo wake ni siku <strong>ya</strong> Idul-adh’ha <strong>na</strong> mwisho wake ni tarehe <strong>kumi</strong><br />
<strong>na</strong> tatu <strong>ya</strong> Dhul-hijja. Mafakihi wa madhehbu mengine wamesema ni tatu<br />
kwa kuishia tarehe <strong>kumi</strong> <strong>na</strong> mbili. Ufafanuzi uko katika kitabu chetu <strong>Al</strong>fiqh<br />
ala madhahibil-khamsa 6<br />
Razi a<strong>na</strong>sema kuwa maulama wengi wa<strong>na</strong>tofautisha bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> siku maalum<br />
<strong>na</strong> siku za kuhisabiwa zilizotajwa katika Juz. 2 (2:203) <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>o<strong>na</strong> kuwa<br />
siku maalum ni siku <strong>kumi</strong> za mwezi wa Dhul-hijja <strong>na</strong> za kuhisabiwa ni<br />
siku za kuchinja.<br />
Basi kuleni katika hao <strong>na</strong> mumlishe mwenye shida aliye fukara.<br />
Wameafikia<strong>na</strong> mafakihi kuhusu wajibu wa kumlisha fukara mn<strong>ya</strong>ma wa<br />
Hijja <strong>na</strong> wakatofauti<strong>na</strong> katika wajibu wa mwenyewe kula. Sisi tuko pamoja<br />
<strong>na</strong> wale wa<strong>na</strong>osema kuwa si wajibu kwa mwenyewe kula. Ni vile atavyoo<strong>na</strong>,<br />
akipenda atakula <strong>na</strong> akipenda ataitoa sadaka yote. Ama kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu: ‘Kuleni katika hao’ ni kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> kuondoa fikra <strong>ya</strong><br />
uharamu wa kula; ambapo wakati wa jahili<strong>ya</strong> walikuwa hawali wan<strong>ya</strong>ma<br />
hao wawachinjao wakidai kuwa ni haramu kwao. Ndipo Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
akawazindua kosa lao hilo.<br />
Kisha wajisafishe taka zao.<br />
6 Kimefasiriwa kwa kiswahili kwa ji<strong>na</strong> la Fiqh katika madhebu tano - Mtarjumu<br />
101
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Haijuzu kwa aliye kwenye Hijja akiwa kwenye ihram (Vazi maalum la<br />
Hijja) kunyoa, kukata kucha au kujipaka manukato; bali mafakihi au<br />
wengi wao wamesema kuwa hata kuua vidudu v<strong>ya</strong> mwilini, kama vile<br />
chawa pia ni haramu. Zikiisha zile siku za Ihram basi i<strong>na</strong>kuwa ni halali<br />
kwake <strong>ya</strong>le <strong>ya</strong>liyokuwa ni haramu, basi hapo atanyoa, kukata kucha n.k.<br />
Ndipo kwa hili ameshiria Mwenyezi Mungu aliposema: Kisha wajisafishe<br />
taka zao.<br />
Na watimize <strong>na</strong>dhiri zao, ikiwa wameweka <strong>na</strong>dhiri siku za Hijja au kabla.<br />
Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu watu wengi huweka <strong>na</strong>dhiri <strong>ya</strong> kutoa sadaka ikiwa Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu atawaruzuku Hijja.<br />
Na waizunguke sa<strong>na</strong> nyumba <strong>ya</strong> kale. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu ndio nyumba <strong>ya</strong><br />
kwanza kuwekewa watu kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> ibada.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ameleta tamko la ‘sa<strong>na</strong>’ kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu ni Sun<strong>na</strong> kufan<strong>ya</strong><br />
tawaf mara nyingi; kama ambavyo pia ni Sun<strong>na</strong> kuswali sa<strong>na</strong>. Ku<strong>na</strong><br />
Hadithi mashuhuri kutoka kwa Mtume wa rehema, aliposema:<br />
“Kuizunguka <strong>Al</strong>-Kaaba ni Swala.’<br />
30. Ndivyo hivyo! Na<br />
a<strong>na</strong>yeitukuza miiko <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu hiyo ni<br />
kheri <strong>ya</strong>ke mbele <strong>ya</strong> Mola<br />
wake. Na mmehalalishiwa<br />
wan<strong>ya</strong>ma howa ila wale mliosomewa.<br />
Basi jiepusheni <strong>na</strong><br />
uchafu wa mizimu <strong>na</strong> mjiepushe<br />
<strong>na</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong> uzushi.<br />
102
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
31. Kwa kumtakasia imani<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu bila <strong>ya</strong><br />
kumshirikisha. Na a<strong>na</strong>yemshrikisha<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
ni kama kwamba ameporomoka,<br />
kisha ndege<br />
wakamn<strong>ya</strong>kua au upepo<br />
ukampeleka mahala mbali.<br />
32. Ndivyo hivyo! Na a<strong>na</strong>yezitukuza<br />
nembo za Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu. Basi hiyo ni katika<br />
takua <strong>ya</strong> nyoyo.<br />
33. Katika hao nyinyi m<strong>na</strong> manufaa<br />
mpaka muda uliowekwa<br />
kisha mahali pake ni nyumba<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kale.<br />
34. Kila umma tumeujaalia<br />
mihanga <strong>ya</strong> ibada, ili wamtaje<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu katika<br />
vile alivyowaruzuku katika<br />
wan<strong>ya</strong>ma howa. Basi Mungu<br />
wenu ni Mungu mmoja tu,<br />
Kwa hiyo jisalimisheni<br />
kwake. Na wabashirie<br />
wanyenyekevu.<br />
103
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
35. Ambao a<strong>na</strong>potajwa<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu nyoyo zao<br />
hutetemeka <strong>na</strong> walio <strong>na</strong> subira<br />
kwa <strong>ya</strong>le <strong>ya</strong>liyowasibu, <strong>na</strong><br />
wa<strong>na</strong>o-simamisha Swala, <strong>na</strong><br />
wa<strong>na</strong>toa<br />
owaruzuku.<br />
katika tulivy-<br />
MIIKO YA MUNGU NA NEMBO ZAKE<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 30 -35<br />
MAANA<br />
Ndivyo hivyo! Na a<strong>na</strong>yeitukuza miiko <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu hiyo ni<br />
kheri <strong>ya</strong>ke mbele <strong>ya</strong> Mola wake.<br />
Kutukuza kuko ai<strong>na</strong> nyingi kutegemea <strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>yetukuzwa <strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong>m<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong><br />
kutukuzwa i<strong>na</strong>yokubalia<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong>ye.<br />
Haku<strong>na</strong> kitu ki<strong>na</strong>chokubalia<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> kumtukuza muumba isipokuwa kumtii<br />
<strong>na</strong> kufuata amri <strong>ya</strong>ke katika kila jambo. Atakayemtii Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong><br />
akafuata amri zake <strong>na</strong> kuacha makatazo <strong>ya</strong>ke, basi atakuwa ametukuza <strong>na</strong><br />
kuadhimisha miiko <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> nembo zake. Taadhima hii au utiifu huu<br />
u<strong>na</strong>mwinua aliyeutenda kwa muumba wake, sio kuwa u<strong>na</strong>mwinua muumbaji,<br />
kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu Yeye hawahitajii walimwengu. Ndio maa<strong>na</strong> akasema:<br />
‘Hiyo ni kheri <strong>ya</strong>ke mbele <strong>ya</strong> Mola wake’ <strong>ya</strong>ani kutukuza hukumu za<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu kwa kumtii ni kheri <strong>ya</strong> huyo mtiifu.<br />
Na mmehalalishiwa wan<strong>ya</strong>ma howa ila wale mliosomewa.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu amemharamishia a<strong>na</strong>yehiji kuwinda akiwa katika Ihram<br />
104
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke, pengine a<strong>na</strong>weza akadhania kuwa ameharamishiwa kula n<strong>ya</strong>ma <strong>ya</strong><br />
wan<strong>ya</strong>ma wa kufugwa. Ndio akabainisha kuwa haku<strong>na</strong> uhusiano bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong><br />
mawili hayo; <strong>na</strong> kwamba walioharamishwa ni mfu <strong>na</strong> waliochinjiwa mizimu.<br />
Angalia Juz. 6 (5:3).<br />
Basi jiepusheni <strong>na</strong> uchafu wa mizimu.<br />
Jiepusheni <strong>na</strong>yo <strong>na</strong> msiiabudu, kama m<strong>na</strong>vyojiepusha <strong>na</strong> uchafu, kwa<br />
<strong>saba</strong>bu yote ni uchafu, ndio maa<strong>na</strong> ikafasiriwa uchafu wa mizimu, ingawaje<br />
ku<strong>na</strong> herufi min, ambayo hapa imekuwa <strong>ya</strong> kuee<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> sio <strong>ya</strong> baadhi,<br />
kama i<strong>na</strong>vyokuwa mara kwa mara.<br />
Na mjiepushe <strong>na</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong> uzushi.<br />
Kauli <strong>ya</strong> uzushi i<strong>na</strong>changan<strong>ya</strong> kila lilioharamishwa; iwe ni uongo, kusengen<strong>ya</strong>,<br />
shutuma <strong>na</strong> ufyosi. Uzushi mba<strong>ya</strong> zaidi ni kuleta ushahidi wa<br />
uongo, kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu u<strong>na</strong>nyima haki <strong>ya</strong> Mungu <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> watu. Mtume (s.a.w.)<br />
a<strong>na</strong>sema: “Uzushi umelinganishwa <strong>na</strong> kumshirikisha Mwenyezi Mungu,”<br />
kisha akasoma A<strong>ya</strong> hii.<br />
Kwa kumtakasia imani Mwenyezi Mungu bila <strong>ya</strong> kumshirikisha.<br />
Yaani kushikama<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> dini <strong>ya</strong> haki <strong>na</strong> kuacha<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> dini potofu. Bila <strong>ya</strong><br />
kumshirikisha ni msisitizo wa hayo. Tumelizungumzia hilo kwa ufafanuzi<br />
zaidi katika Juz. 15 (17:107).<br />
Na a<strong>na</strong>yemshrikisha Mwenyezi Mungu ni kama kwamba ameporomoka,<br />
kisha ndege wakamn<strong>ya</strong>kua au upepo ukampeleka mahala<br />
mbali.<br />
Hiki ni ki<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong> cha dhambi <strong>ya</strong> shirki kwamba haifa<strong>na</strong>ni <strong>na</strong> dhambi yoyote,<br />
<strong>na</strong> kwamba adhabu <strong>ya</strong> mshiriki<strong>na</strong> haishindwi <strong>na</strong> adhabu yoyote. Mwenye<br />
kufuatilia A<strong>ya</strong> za Qur’an <strong>na</strong> Sun<strong>na</strong> za Mtume atao<strong>na</strong> kuwa mshiriki<strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong><br />
dhambi kubwa zaidi kuliko mlahidi mbele <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu.<br />
105
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
I<strong>na</strong>wezeka<strong>na</strong> siri <strong>ya</strong> hilo ni kuwa mlahidi hathibitishi upungufu wa muumba,<br />
kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu yeye hakubali kabisa kuwa yuko. Hii pia ni dhambi kubwa,<br />
hilo hali<strong>na</strong> shaka, lakini dhambi <strong>ya</strong> mshiriki<strong>na</strong> ni kubwa zaidi, kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu<br />
ni kumshirikisha muumba kwa upande mmoja <strong>na</strong> ni kuthibitisha upungufu<br />
kwa muumba kwa upande wa pili.<br />
Ndivyo hivyo! Na a<strong>na</strong>yezitukuza nembo za Mwenyezi Mungu. Basi<br />
hiyo ni katika takua <strong>ya</strong> nyoyo.<br />
Nembo za Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> miiko <strong>ya</strong>ke zi<strong>na</strong> maa<strong>na</strong> moja.<br />
Tumezungumzia kuhusu miiko katika A<strong>ya</strong> iliyotangulia. Haku<strong>na</strong> mwenye<br />
shaka kwamba hawatii amri za Mwenyezi Mungu isipokuwa wenye takua<br />
<strong>na</strong> ikhlasi.<br />
Miongoni mwa kutukuza nembo za Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> kutii hukumu<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke ni kuchinja mn<strong>ya</strong>ma aliyeno<strong>na</strong> asiye <strong>na</strong> kasoro yoyote siku za Hijja.<br />
Mtume (s.a.w.) a<strong>na</strong>sema: “Hafai aliye kiguru, wala aliyekonda, wala<br />
aliyetobolewa sikio wala aliyekatwa sikio wala aliyevunjika pembe.”<br />
Katika hao nyinyi m<strong>na</strong> manufaa mpaka muda uliowekwa.<br />
Katika hao ni hao wa kuchinjwa kwenye Hijja. Muda uliowekwa ni wakati<br />
wa kuchinjwa. Maa<strong>na</strong> ni kuwa mwenye kuhiji a<strong>na</strong>ruhusiwa kunufaika <strong>na</strong><br />
maziwa <strong>na</strong> mgongo wa mn<strong>ya</strong>ma wa kuchinja mpaka wakati wa kuchinja.<br />
Katika Tafsiru-Razi imeelezwa kwamba Mtume wa Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
alimpitia mtu akimkokokota mn<strong>ya</strong>ma <strong>na</strong> yeye mwenyewe amechoka.<br />
Mtume akamwambia: “Mpande.” Yule mtu akasema: “Huyu ni wa kuchinja<br />
kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> Hijja ewe Mtume wa Mwenyezi Mungu!” Akasema<br />
Mtume: “Ole wako, mpande!”<br />
A<strong>na</strong>endelea kusema Razi: “Abu Hanifa hajuzishi hilo, akatoa hoja kuwa<br />
haijuzu kumkodisha kwa hiyo haijuzu kumpanda.” Razi akamjibu Abu<br />
Hanifa kwamba hoja hii ni dhaifu, kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu, mjakazi aliyezaa <strong>na</strong> mmi-<br />
106
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
liki wake hauzwi, lakini i<strong>na</strong>juzu kunufaika <strong>na</strong>ye.<br />
Kisha mahali pake ni nyumba <strong>ya</strong> kale.<br />
Yaani mahali pake pa kuchinjwa ni nyumba <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu takatifu<br />
<strong>na</strong> makusudio <strong>ya</strong>ke ni haram yote ikiwemo Mi<strong>na</strong>. Katika Hadith<br />
imeelezwa. Mi<strong>na</strong> yote ni machinjioni.<br />
Kila umma tumeujaalia mihanga <strong>ya</strong> ibada.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> mihanga <strong>ya</strong> ibada hapa ni kuchinja wan<strong>ya</strong>ma kwa dalili <strong>ya</strong><br />
kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu, Ili wamtaje Mwenyezi Mungu katika vile<br />
alivyowaruzuku katika wan<strong>ya</strong>ma howa, iliyokuja moja kwa moja.<br />
Maa<strong>na</strong> ni kuwa haku<strong>na</strong> bid’a (uzushi) katika kuchinja mn<strong>ya</strong>ma, ilikuweko<br />
katika dini zilizotangulia.<br />
Basi Mungu wenu ni Mungu mmoja tu. Kwa hiyo msimtaje mwengine<br />
katika dhabihu zenu.<br />
Kwa hiyo jisalimisheni kwake.<br />
Yaani fuateni amri <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> mumfanyie ikhlasi katika kauli <strong>na</strong> vitendo.<br />
Na wabashirie wanyenyekevu, ambao a<strong>na</strong>potajwa Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
nyoyo zao hutetemeka, <strong>na</strong> walio <strong>na</strong> subira kwa <strong>ya</strong>le <strong>ya</strong>liyowasibu, <strong>na</strong><br />
wa<strong>na</strong>osimamisha Swala <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>toa katika tulivyowaruzuku.<br />
Mpe habari njema <strong>ya</strong> Pepo, ewe Muhammad, yule a<strong>na</strong>yemnyenyekea<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu, akamwogopa akawa <strong>na</strong> uthabiti kwenye dini wakati wa<br />
raha <strong>na</strong> dhiki, akamwabudu bila <strong>ya</strong> u<strong>na</strong>fiki wala ria <strong>na</strong> akatoa mali <strong>ya</strong>ke<br />
katika kumtii Mungu <strong>na</strong> kutaka radhi <strong>ya</strong>ke. Haku<strong>na</strong> shaka kwamba<br />
mwenye kukusan<strong>ya</strong> sifa hizi atakuwa <strong>na</strong> daraja <strong>ya</strong> juu mbele <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> watu.<br />
107
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
36. Na ngamia wa kuno<strong>na</strong> tumewafanyia<br />
kuwa ni miongoni<br />
mwa nembo za Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu, kwao m<strong>na</strong> kheri.<br />
Basi litajeni ji<strong>na</strong> la Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu juu <strong>ya</strong>o wa<strong>na</strong>posimama<br />
safu. Na wa<strong>na</strong>poanguka<br />
ubavu, basi kuleni <strong>na</strong><br />
mlisheni aliyeki<strong>na</strong>i <strong>na</strong> aombaye.<br />
Kama hivyo tumewafan<strong>ya</strong><br />
hawa wawe dhalili<br />
kwenu ili mpate kushukuru.<br />
37. N<strong>ya</strong>ma zao hazimfikii wala<br />
damu zao, lakini i<strong>na</strong>mfikia<br />
takua kutoka kwenu. Kama<br />
hivyo tumewafan<strong>ya</strong> hawa<br />
wawe dhalili kwenu ili mumtukuze<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
kwa alivyowaongoa. Na<br />
wabashirie wenye kufan<strong>ya</strong><br />
mema.<br />
NGAMIA WANONO<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 36 -37<br />
MAANA<br />
Na ngamia wa kuno<strong>na</strong> tumewafanyia kuwa ni miongoni mwa nembo<br />
za Mwenyezi Mungu, kwao m<strong>na</strong> kheri.<br />
Neno ‘Bud<strong>na</strong>’ ni ngamia hasa; kama ilivyoelezwa katika Tafsiri Razi, <strong>na</strong><br />
108
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Baydhawi. Hufa<strong>na</strong>nishwa <strong>na</strong>ye ng’ombe katika hukumu si katika ji<strong>na</strong>.<br />
Hali yoyote iwayo, mtu ni <strong>na</strong>tija <strong>ya</strong> mambo mengi, <strong>ya</strong>kiwemo mazingira<br />
a<strong>na</strong>yoishi. Waarabu, kwa karne nyingi, wakati wa jahili<strong>ya</strong> <strong>na</strong> baadaye,<br />
wameishi pamoja <strong>na</strong> ngamia <strong>na</strong> alikuwa ni sehemu <strong>ya</strong> maisha <strong>ya</strong>o; wakila<br />
n<strong>ya</strong>ma <strong>ya</strong>ke, kunywa maziwa <strong>ya</strong>ke , kuvaa manyo<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ke, kubebea mizigo<br />
kutoka mji mmoja hadi mwingine n.k. Tazama Juz. 14 (16: 6).<br />
Kwa ajili hii ndio maa<strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) akamtaja kwenye A<strong>ya</strong><br />
kadha, kwa tamko la kiujumla; kama vile wan<strong>ya</strong>ma howa, au kwa tamko<br />
mahususi; kama ilivyo katika Sura 88 <strong>na</strong> hii A<strong>ya</strong> tuliyo <strong>na</strong>yo.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) amewaneemesha waja wake kwa ngamia <strong>na</strong><br />
akamfan<strong>ya</strong> a<strong>na</strong> manufaa mengi; <strong>ya</strong>kiwemo kujikurubisha mja kwa<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu kwa kumchinja katika nyumba <strong>ya</strong>ke takatifu. Kuleta<br />
ibara <strong>ya</strong> nembo kwa dhabihu hii ni kufahamaisha kuwa hiyo ni twaa <strong>na</strong><br />
ibada bora zaidi.<br />
Basi litajeni ji<strong>na</strong> la Mwenyezi Mungu juu <strong>ya</strong>o wa<strong>na</strong>posimama safu.<br />
Katika masharti <strong>ya</strong> kuchinja ni kusoma Bismillah <strong>na</strong> kuelekezwa chinjo<br />
upande wa Qibla, <strong>na</strong> ngamia kuwa <strong>na</strong> ai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>ya</strong> kuchinjwa (<strong>na</strong>hr)<br />
ambayo ni maalum kwa ngamia: A<strong>na</strong>chomwa kisu au kitu chochote chenye<br />
ncha kwenye maungio <strong>ya</strong> shingo <strong>na</strong> kifua, akiwa ngamia amesimama au<br />
kupiga magoti au amelala ubavu, kwa sharti <strong>ya</strong> kuwa sehemu zote za<br />
mbele <strong>ya</strong> mwili wake zielekee Qibla.<br />
Njia bora ni kumchinja ngamia kwa <strong>na</strong>m<strong>na</strong> ilivyoelezwa katika Riwa<strong>ya</strong><br />
ambayo ni kusimamishwa ngamia <strong>na</strong> kufungwa mmoja wa miguu <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>ya</strong><br />
mbele <strong>na</strong> asimame mchinjaji kuelekea Qibla vile vile kisha amchome<br />
kwenye maungio <strong>ya</strong> shingo <strong>na</strong> kifua. Riwa<strong>ya</strong> hii i<strong>na</strong>weza kufaa kuwa ni<br />
tafsiri <strong>ya</strong> neno ‘wa<strong>na</strong>posimama safu.’<br />
Na wa<strong>na</strong>poanguka ubavu, <strong>ya</strong>ani wa<strong>na</strong>poanguka chini <strong>na</strong> kukata roho,<br />
basi kuleni <strong>na</strong> mlisheni aliyeki<strong>na</strong>i <strong>na</strong> aombaye.<br />
<strong>Al</strong>iyeki<strong>na</strong>i ni yule a<strong>na</strong>yeridhia u<strong>na</strong>chompa bila <strong>ya</strong> kuomba.Kama hivyo<br />
tumewafan<strong>ya</strong> hawa wawe dhalili kwenu ili mpate kushukuru.<br />
109
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) amewafan<strong>ya</strong> wan<strong>ya</strong>ma tuwatumie, hata kuwachinja<br />
pia. Kwa hiyo ni wajibu wetu kushukuru.<br />
N<strong>ya</strong>ma zao hazimfikii wala damu zao. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
mwenye kujitosha <strong>na</strong> walimwengu, hawahitajii, sikwambii n<strong>ya</strong>ma zilizochinjwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> damu; bali haihitajii chochote.<br />
Imesemeka<strong>na</strong> hii ni kuwarudi washiriki<strong>na</strong> ambao walikuwa wakitapakaza<br />
damu <strong>ya</strong> dhabihu kwenye masa<strong>na</strong>mu <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong> kuta za <strong>Al</strong>-Kaaba.<br />
Lakini i<strong>na</strong>mfikia takua kutoka kwenu.<br />
U<strong>na</strong>weza kuuliza kuwa maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> takua ni kumcha Mungu katika <strong>ya</strong>le aliyo<strong>ya</strong>haramisha;<br />
ambapo thawabu <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> manufaa <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>rudi <strong>na</strong> kumfikia<br />
mtendaji tu. Sasa nini maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kuwa i<strong>na</strong>fika kwa Mungu?<br />
Jibu: Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> takua hapa ni kumridhisha Mwenyezi Mungu, <strong>na</strong> radhi<br />
<strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu haiepukani <strong>na</strong> mwenye takua, zi<strong>na</strong>kwenda sambamba.<br />
Kwa hiyo maa<strong>na</strong> ni ki<strong>na</strong>chomfikia Mwenyezi Mungu katika dhabihu<br />
zenu ni kule kuridhiwa <strong>na</strong> Mungu sio kukasirikiwa. I<strong>na</strong>fa<strong>na</strong><strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
kumwambia mwa<strong>na</strong>o: kufaulu kwako darasani ku<strong>na</strong>nifan<strong>ya</strong> ni kupende <strong>na</strong><br />
kukuridhia, <strong>na</strong> ha<strong>ya</strong> ndiyo ni<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>pata kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> masomo <strong>na</strong> kufaulu<br />
kwako.<br />
Kama hivyo tumewafan<strong>ya</strong> hawa wawe dhalili kwenu ili mumtukuze<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu kwa alivyowaongoa.<br />
Amewadhalilisha wan<strong>ya</strong>ma kwa waja wake <strong>na</strong> akawaongoza kujikurubisha<br />
kwake kwa kuwachinja ili wamsifu kwa sifa zake njema, wamuadhimishe<br />
kwa ujuzi wake <strong>na</strong> uweza wake, wahofie adhabu <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> kutumai<br />
thawabu zake.<br />
Wabashirie wenye kufan<strong>ya</strong> mema wote; wawe wamefan<strong>ya</strong> mema kwa<br />
kujikurubisha kwa Mwenyezi Mungu kwa kuchinja au kwa jambo jinginelo.<br />
Kwani ai<strong>na</strong> za wema hazi<strong>na</strong> idadi. Bora zaidi ni kupiga<strong>na</strong> jihadi <strong>na</strong><br />
madhalimu <strong>na</strong> wapotevu japokuwa kwa tamko la haki <strong>na</strong> uadilifu.<br />
110
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
38. Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
huwakinga walioamini.<br />
Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
hampendi kila haini, mwenye<br />
kukufuru sa<strong>na</strong>.<br />
39. Wameruhusiwa (kupiga<strong>na</strong>)<br />
wale wa<strong>na</strong>opigwa vita kwa<br />
<strong>saba</strong>bu wamedhulumiwa. Na<br />
kwa hakika Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu ni Muweza wa kuwa-<br />
saidia.<br />
40. Wale ambao wametolewa<br />
majumbani mwao pasipo<br />
haki, ila tu kwa kuwa wa<strong>na</strong>sema<br />
Mola wetu ni Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu. Na lau Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu asingeliwakinga watu<br />
kwa watu, basi <strong>ya</strong>ngelivunjwa<br />
mahekalu <strong>na</strong> makanisa <strong>na</strong><br />
(sehemu) za kuswalia <strong>na</strong><br />
misikiti ambayo ndani <strong>ya</strong>ke<br />
hutajwa ji<strong>na</strong> la Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu kwa wingi. Na hakika<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu humnusuru<br />
yule a<strong>na</strong>yemnusuru Yeye.<br />
Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
Mwenye nguvu, Mtukufu.<br />
111
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
41. Wale ambao tukiwamakinisha<br />
katika ardhi husimamisha<br />
Swala <strong>na</strong> wakatoa<br />
Zaka <strong>na</strong> wakaamrisha mema<br />
<strong>na</strong> wakakataza maba<strong>ya</strong>. Na<br />
kwa Mwenyezi Mungu ndio<br />
marejeo <strong>ya</strong> mambo yote.<br />
MWENYEZI MUNGU HUWAKINGA WALIOAMINI<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 38 – 41<br />
MAANA<br />
Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu huwakinga walioamini. Hakika Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu hampendi kila haini mwenye kukufuru sa<strong>na</strong>.<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> hii i<strong>na</strong>fahamisha kuwa Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) a<strong>na</strong>zuia ukafiri <strong>na</strong><br />
utaghuti kwa waumini katika maisha ha<strong>ya</strong> <strong>na</strong> siku <strong>ya</strong> mwisho. A<strong>ya</strong> iliyo<br />
wazi zaidi katika hilo ni: “Hakika bila shaka tutawanusuru Mitume wetu <strong>na</strong><br />
walioamini katika uhai wa duniani <strong>na</strong> siku watakaposimama mashahidi.”<br />
(40:51).<br />
Pamoja <strong>na</strong> hayo Mwenyezi Mungu ameashiria kwenye A<strong>ya</strong> kadhaa, kwamba<br />
ma<strong>ya</strong>hudi walikuwa wakiwaua ma<strong>na</strong>bii bila <strong>ya</strong> haki. Miongoni mwazo<br />
ni: Juz.3 (3: 21), Juz. 4 (3:112, 181) <strong>na</strong> Juz 6 (4:154). Kuongezea Historia<br />
<strong>ya</strong> mwa<strong>na</strong>damu, tangu zamani <strong>na</strong> sasa, imejaa dhulma <strong>na</strong> kufanyiwa uadui<br />
wale wenye takua <strong>na</strong> ikhlasi.<br />
Sasa je, ku<strong>na</strong> wajihi wa kukusan<strong>ya</strong> bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> zi<strong>na</strong>zofahamisha kuuliwa watu<br />
wema <strong>na</strong> zile zi<strong>na</strong>zofahamisha kunusuriwa watu wa haki?<br />
Jibu: Kwanza: A<strong>ya</strong> za nusra zi<strong>na</strong>wahusu baadhi <strong>ya</strong> mitume; kama vile:<br />
Nuh, Hud, Swaleh, Lut <strong>na</strong> Muhammad. Hayo <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>ashiriwa <strong>na</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke<br />
112
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu Mtukufu: “Na Mwenyezi Mungu humuunga mkono<br />
kwa nusra <strong>ya</strong>ke amtakaye.” Juz.3 (3:13). Na A<strong>ya</strong> hii tuliyo <strong>na</strong>yo i<strong>na</strong>fahamisha<br />
kuwa Muhammad (s.a.w.) <strong>na</strong> maswahaba ndio wanokusudiwa<br />
kwenye kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke ‘Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu huwakinga walioamni.’<br />
Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu wao ndio waliotolewa majumbani mwao si kwa lolote ila ni<br />
kwa kuwa wamesema: ‘Mola wetu ni Mwenyezi Mungu.”<br />
Katika vitabu v<strong>ya</strong> Hadith (As-sihah) imeelezwa kwamba A<strong>ya</strong> hizi zilishuka<br />
wakati Mtume alipofan<strong>ya</strong> hijra (kuhama) kutoka Makka kwenda<br />
Madi<strong>na</strong>.<br />
Pili: Mwenye haki <strong>na</strong> ikhlasi hawezi kukosa wa kumuunga mkono <strong>na</strong> kumsaidia<br />
kwa mkono wake, mali <strong>ya</strong>ke au ulimi wake. Wala hatujawahi<br />
kusikia jamii ambayo kwa pamoja imekuwa dhidi <strong>ya</strong> mwenye kutamka<br />
tamko la haki <strong>na</strong> uadilifu.<br />
Ndio, ni kweli kwamba watetezi wa haki wengi wameuawa, wakatekwa <strong>na</strong><br />
wakafukuzwa, lakini Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong>wapa wasaidizi wanotangaza<br />
misimamo <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong> kuwatukuza <strong>na</strong> wakiwakabili maadui zao kwa hoja <strong>na</strong><br />
dalii mkataa. Hii ni ai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> nusra. Kusema kwake Mwenyezi Mungu:<br />
‘Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu hampendi kila haini’ ni <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke:<br />
‘Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu huwakinga walioamni.’<br />
Sababu hii i<strong>na</strong>fahamisha kuwa ni wajibu kwa a<strong>na</strong>yemwamini Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu kumsaidia mumin kwa kila alicho<strong>na</strong>cho ki<strong>na</strong>choweza kumsaidia,<br />
angalau kumtetea a<strong>na</strong>potajwa kwa uba<strong>ya</strong>; vinginevyo atakuwa ni mhaini<br />
mwingi wa kukanusha. Ku<strong>na</strong> Hadith sahih isemayo: “ Mwenye kuin<strong>ya</strong>mazia<br />
haki ni shetani bubu.<br />
Tatu: Lau ingekuwa mtu akiamini tu, basi a<strong>na</strong>ondokewa <strong>na</strong> muadui <strong>na</strong><br />
matatizo, basi wangeliamini watu wote imani <strong>ya</strong> kibiashara; kama vile<br />
a<strong>na</strong>yeiuza dhamiri <strong>ya</strong>ke kwa kila mwenye kutoa thamani.<br />
113
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Nne: Imani <strong>ya</strong> haki ni kumtii Mwenyezi Mungu katika maamrisho <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong><br />
hukumu zake zote. Na Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) ametuamrisha, tukitaka<br />
kufan<strong>ya</strong> jambo, tufuate <strong>saba</strong>bu za kimaumbile ambazo amezifan<strong>ya</strong><br />
zitekeleze matakwa yetu. Ameziweka <strong>saba</strong>bu za ushindi kuwa ni umoja <strong>na</strong><br />
kuandaa nguvu, akasema: “Wala msizozane, msije mkavunjika moyo <strong>na</strong><br />
zikapotea nguvu zenu.” Na akasema: “Na waandalieni nguvu vile<br />
muwezavyo.” Juz. 10 (8: 46, 60).<br />
Katika Futuhatul-Mkki<strong>ya</strong>, Ibnul A’arabiy ameziletea <strong>saba</strong>bu hizi ibara <strong>ya</strong><br />
mkono wa Mungu. Ameichukua ibara hii katika kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu Mtukufu: “Je, hawaoni kwamba tumewaumbia kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> iliyofan<strong>ya</strong><br />
mikono yetu wan<strong>ya</strong>ma wa mifugo wakawa wenye kuwamiliki.”<br />
(36:71).<br />
Tazama maelezo kwa anuani <strong>ya</strong> ‘Dini haioteshi ngano’ katika Juz.3 (8: 1-<br />
4).<br />
Wameruhusiwa (kupiga<strong>na</strong>) wale wa<strong>na</strong>opigwa vita kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu<br />
wamedhulumiwa. Na kwa hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni Muweza wa<br />
kuwasaidia.<br />
Waislamu kule Makka walikuwa ni wanyonge, wakipata kila ai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong><br />
maudhi <strong>na</strong> ukandamizwaji kutoka kwa washiriki<strong>na</strong>; <strong>na</strong> walikuwa<br />
hawawezi kujitetetea. Walikuwa wakimjia Mtume wa Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
(s.a.w.) <strong>na</strong> wakimshitakia dhulma, <strong>na</strong>ye akiwa ha<strong>na</strong> lolote la kuwaambia<br />
isipokuwa kuwausia subra. Miongoni mwa aliyokuwa akiwaambia ni:<br />
“Mimi sijaamriwa kupiga<strong>na</strong>.”<br />
Mtume alikatazwa kupiga<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> washiriki<strong>na</strong> katika zaidi <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> 70,<br />
alipokuwa Makka. kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu kupiga<strong>na</strong> wakati huo ilikuwa ni sawa <strong>na</strong><br />
kujimaliza. Tazama Juz.5 (4:77).<br />
114
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> Mtume <strong>na</strong> Waislamu kuhamia Madi<strong>na</strong>, wakawa <strong>na</strong> nguvu, ndipo<br />
ikashuka A<strong>ya</strong> hii. I<strong>na</strong>semeka<strong>na</strong> kuwa ndio A<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kwanza kushuka kuhusia<strong>na</strong><br />
<strong>na</strong> vita.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) amebainisha <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> kutoa ruhusa hii; kwamba<br />
washiriki<strong>na</strong> wamewachokoza waislamu, wakawatoa kwenye miji <strong>ya</strong>o<br />
kwa dhulma <strong>na</strong> kwa uadui <strong>na</strong> akawaahidi waislamu ushindi kwa maadui<br />
zao, pale aliposema: “Na kwa hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni Muweza wa<br />
kuwasaidia.”<br />
Wale ambao wametolewa majumbani mwao pasipo haki, ila kwa<br />
kuwa wa<strong>na</strong>sema Mola wetu ni Mwenyezi Mungu.<br />
Dhahiri <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> i<strong>na</strong>onyesha kuwa kosa pekee la Mtume <strong>na</strong> swahaba zake<br />
kwa washiriki<strong>na</strong> ni kule kusema: “Haku<strong>na</strong> Mola isipokuwa Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu.” Dhahiri hii ndio walioichukua wafasiri wote; bali mmoja wa<br />
wafasiri wap<strong>ya</strong> alisema, ni<strong>na</strong>mnukuu: “Haku<strong>na</strong> upinzani kuliko kupinga<br />
maisha ha<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong>liyojikita kwenye tamaa, kupinga<strong>na</strong> masilahi, kutofautia<strong>na</strong><br />
mielekeo <strong>na</strong> kugonga<strong>na</strong> matamanio.”<br />
Mara nyingi tumeashiria huko nyuma kwamba utaghuti wa kishiriki<strong>na</strong> uliupiga<br />
vita ujumbe wa Muhammad <strong>na</strong> neno la Tawhid si kwa lolote<br />
isipokuwa li<strong>na</strong>taka kuondoa manufaa, matamanio, masilahi <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong> kuweka<br />
usawa bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> watu. Angalia tuliyo<strong>ya</strong>andika kwa anuani <strong>ya</strong> ‘Masilahi<br />
ndio <strong>saba</strong>bu’ katika Juz. 1 (2: 92-96).<br />
Na lau Mwenyezi Mungu asingeliwakinga watu kwa watu, basi <strong>ya</strong>ngelivunjwa<br />
mahekalu <strong>na</strong> makanisa <strong>na</strong> (sehemu) za kuswalia <strong>na</strong> misikiti<br />
ambayo ndani <strong>ya</strong>ke hutajwa ji<strong>na</strong> la Mwenyezi Mungu kwa wingi.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) kuwaruhusu waumini, wa<strong>na</strong>ochokozwa,<br />
kupiga<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> washiriki<strong>na</strong>, sasa a<strong>na</strong>bainisha <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> ruhusa<br />
hiyo; kwamba lau si kuweko <strong>na</strong> nguvu <strong>ya</strong> upinzani, basi ingeenea vurugu<br />
115
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
<strong>na</strong> ufisadi katika ardhi kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> un<strong>ya</strong>ng’nyi, uporaji <strong>na</strong> kumwagika<br />
damu; hasa bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> vikundi <strong>na</strong> watu wa dini.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ameielezea fit<strong>na</strong> bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> mataifa kwa ibara <strong>ya</strong> kuvunjwa<br />
sehemu zake za kuabudu. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu ndio sehemu muhimu kwa<br />
mataifa; <strong>na</strong> zi<strong>na</strong> alama maalum zi<strong>na</strong>zotofautia<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> nyingine. Mahekalu ni<br />
<strong>ya</strong> ma<strong>ya</strong>hudi, makanisa ni <strong>ya</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>swara (wakiristo), <strong>na</strong> sehemu za<br />
kuswalia ni zamataifa mengineyo. Msikiti u<strong>na</strong>tofautia<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> sehemu<br />
nyingine kwa kuwa Swala humo ni mara tano, usiku <strong>na</strong> mcha<strong>na</strong>.<br />
Kundi la wafasiri wamesema kuwa makusudio <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> ni kuwa Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu a<strong>na</strong>wazuwi<strong>ya</strong> waumini <strong>na</strong> makafiri. Kama itakuwa ni sawa tafsiri<br />
hiyo, haiwezi kufaa kila wakati. Usahihi hasa ni tuliouelezea, kuwa ili<br />
kuhifadhika amani <strong>na</strong> nidhamu ni lazima kuweko <strong>na</strong> nguvu <strong>ya</strong> upinzani; ni<br />
sawa nguvu hiyo iwe mikononi mwa waumini au makafiri.<br />
Imam <strong>Al</strong>i (a.s.) a<strong>na</strong>sema: “Hapa<strong>na</strong> budi watu wawe <strong>na</strong> kiongozi mwema au<br />
muovu, atatumiwa <strong>na</strong> mumin <strong>na</strong> kafiri, Mwenyezi Mungu atafikisha<br />
kwaye muda. Watu watajikusan<strong>ya</strong> kwake waweze kumpiga adui, nia<br />
zitakuwa <strong>na</strong> amani kwaye, mwenye nguvu atakamatwa kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong><br />
kumuonea mnyonge ili astarehe <strong>na</strong> kila muovu.”<br />
Kauli hii <strong>ya</strong> Imam <strong>Al</strong>i, ilikuwa ni kuwarudi Khawariji waliposema:<br />
“Haku<strong>na</strong> hukumu isipokuwa <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu.” Angalia tuliyo<strong>ya</strong>andika<br />
kwa anuani hii, kwenye Juz. 12 (12:40).<br />
Na hakika Mwenyezi Mungu humnusuru yule a<strong>na</strong>yemnusuru Yeye.<br />
Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni Mwenye nguvu, Mtukufu.<br />
Hiki ni kichocheo cha kupiga<strong>na</strong> jihadi <strong>ya</strong> kuinusuru haki <strong>na</strong> watu wake.<br />
Wale ambao tukiwamakinisha katika ardhi husimamisha Swala <strong>na</strong><br />
wakatoa Zaka <strong>na</strong> wakaamrisha mema <strong>na</strong> wakakataza maba<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> kumakinishwa hapa ni utawala. Mwenyezi Mungu ameapa<br />
116
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
kwa msisitizo kwamba Yeye atawasaidia watawala, kwa sharti <strong>ya</strong> kuweko<br />
mambo mawili:<br />
Kwanza, wao wenyewe watekeleze haki <strong>ya</strong> ibada kwa ukamilifu; kama<br />
vile Swala, Saumu <strong>na</strong> kuamrisha mema <strong>na</strong> kukataza maovu. Ibada <strong>ya</strong><br />
kimwili ameileta kwa ibara <strong>ya</strong> Swala <strong>na</strong> ibada <strong>ya</strong> kimali kwa Zaka.<br />
Jambo la pili, ni kufan<strong>ya</strong> uadilifu bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> watu, kuisimamisha haki <strong>na</strong><br />
kuibatilisha batili. Hayo ndio makusudio <strong>ya</strong> kuamrisha mema <strong>na</strong> kukataza<br />
maovu. Akivunja moja tu <strong>ya</strong> mawili ha<strong>ya</strong>, Mwenyezi Mungu humpuuza <strong>na</strong><br />
humwacha.<br />
U<strong>na</strong>weza kuuliza: Tumewao<strong>na</strong> watawala wengi wasiomwamini Mungu<br />
kabisa, sikwambii kumwabudu kwa kuswali <strong>na</strong> kutoa Zaka, lakini pamoja<br />
<strong>na</strong> hayo utawala wao umestawi <strong>na</strong> kufuatwa <strong>na</strong> raia kwa vile wametimiza<br />
malengo <strong>ya</strong> raia <strong>na</strong> kuwatumikia, wala raia hawaangalii imani <strong>ya</strong>o. Kwa<br />
hiyo, i<strong>na</strong>onyesha, suala la imani sio sharti la kudumu utawala <strong>na</strong> ustawi<br />
wake?<br />
Jibu: Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> nusra <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu, katika A<strong>ya</strong>, ni kuustawisha<br />
utawala katika dunia <strong>na</strong> thawabu za akhera; bali hii ndio nusra <strong>ya</strong><br />
kiuhakika. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu ufalme wa dunia u<strong>na</strong>ondoka, lakini neema za<br />
akhera ni za kudumu bila <strong>ya</strong> kuwa <strong>na</strong> ukomo <strong>na</strong> ni msafi <strong>na</strong> wa raha kwa<br />
pande zake zote.<br />
Mtawala wa dunia a<strong>na</strong>weza kuustawisha utawala wake duniani akiwa<br />
mwadilifu, lakini Akhera akapata adhabu <strong>ya</strong> kuungua kwa kukufuru kwake<br />
dalili za kilimwengu ambazo zi<strong>na</strong>onyesha kuweko mtengenezaji.<br />
Na kwa Mwenyezi Mungu ndio marejeo <strong>ya</strong> mambo yote. Yeye peke<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke ndio Mfalme wa wafalme, huumpa ufalme amtakaye <strong>na</strong> humnyima<br />
ufalme amtakaye, <strong>na</strong> yeye ni Muweza wa kila kitu.<br />
117
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
42. Wakikukadhibisha, basi<br />
wamekadhibisha kabla <strong>ya</strong>o<br />
kaumu <strong>ya</strong> Nuh <strong>na</strong> ki<strong>na</strong> A’d <strong>na</strong><br />
Thamud.<br />
43. Na kaumu <strong>ya</strong> Ibrahim <strong>na</strong><br />
kaumu <strong>ya</strong> Lut.<br />
44. Na watu wa Mad<strong>ya</strong>n <strong>na</strong> Musa<br />
alikadhibishwa. Nikawapa<br />
muda makafiri kisha nikawatia<br />
mkononi, basi kulikuwaje<br />
kukan<strong>ya</strong> kwangu?<br />
45. Na miji mingapi tuliyoiangamiza<br />
iliyokuwa ikidhulumu.<br />
Ikaangukia<strong>na</strong> mapaa<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> visima vilivyoachwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> makasri <strong>ya</strong>liyo madhubuti?<br />
46. Je, hawatembei katika ardhi<br />
ili wapate akili za kuzingatia<br />
<strong>na</strong> masikio <strong>ya</strong> kusikilia?<br />
118
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Kwani hakika si macho <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>yopofuka,<br />
lakini zi<strong>na</strong>zopofuka ni<br />
nyoyo zilizomo vifuani.<br />
47. Wa<strong>na</strong>kuharakisha ulete<br />
adhabu <strong>na</strong> hakika Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu hakhalifu miadi <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Na hakika siku moja kwa<br />
Mola wako ni kama miaka<br />
elfu m<strong>na</strong>vyohisabu.<br />
48. Ni miji mingapi nimeipa<br />
muda <strong>na</strong> hali ilikuwa imedhulumu,<br />
kisha nikaitia<br />
mkononi? Na kwangu mimi<br />
ndio marejeo yote.<br />
49. Sema: Enyi watu! Hakika<br />
mimi ni muon<strong>ya</strong>ji kwenu<br />
niliye dhahiri.<br />
50. Basi wale ambao wameamini<br />
<strong>na</strong> wakatenda mema, watapata<br />
maghufira <strong>na</strong> riziki za heshima.<br />
51. Na wa<strong>na</strong>ojitahidi kuzipinga<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> zetu hao ndio watu wa<br />
motoni<br />
119
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
WAKIKUKADHABISHA<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 42 -51<br />
MAANA<br />
Wakikukadhibisha, basi wamekadhibisha kabla <strong>ya</strong>o kaumu <strong>ya</strong> Nuh <strong>na</strong><br />
ki<strong>na</strong> A’d <strong>na</strong> Thamud <strong>na</strong> kaumu <strong>ya</strong> Ibrahim <strong>na</strong> kaumu <strong>ya</strong> Lut <strong>na</strong> watu<br />
wa Mad<strong>ya</strong>n <strong>na</strong> Musa alikadhibishwa.<br />
Makuraishi walimkadhibisha Muhammad (s.a.w.) <strong>na</strong> wakamtoa nyumbani<br />
kwake, Mwenyezi Mungu akamwambia Mtume wake, kwa kumtuliza <strong>na</strong><br />
kumpoza moyo, kwamba haku<strong>na</strong> la ajabu katika <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>yokutokea. Kila<br />
Nabii alipamba<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> hayo uliyopamaba<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong>yo. Kisha akamtajia idadi <strong>ya</strong><br />
ma<strong>na</strong>bii, kwa njia <strong>ya</strong> mfano tu; akiwemo Hud <strong>na</strong> watu wake walioitwa A’d,<br />
Swaleh <strong>na</strong> watu wake walioitwa Thamud. Ama watu wa Mad<strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong> hao ni<br />
watu wa Shuayb. Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 7 (6:34).<br />
Nikawapa muda makafiri kisha nikawatia mkononi, basi kulikuwaje<br />
kukan<strong>ya</strong> kwangu?<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> kukan<strong>ya</strong> hapa ni adhabu, kwa maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kukan<strong>ya</strong> kwa vitendo<br />
sio kwa maneno. Maa<strong>na</strong> ni kuwa Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) aliwacheleweshea<br />
makafiri adhabu mpaka ulipofika muda wake, akawapatiliza<br />
kwa upatilizo wa mwenye uweza asiyeshindwa.<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> i<strong>na</strong>ashiria kwamba mwenye akili hatakikani kuharakisha mambo<br />
kabla <strong>ya</strong> kufikia muda wake.<br />
Na miji mingapai tuliyoiangamiza iliyokuwa ikidhulumu.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu kusema kuwa a<strong>na</strong>wapa muda makafiri mpaka<br />
wakati maalum, sasa a<strong>na</strong>ishiria kuangamia kwa miji ambayo watu wake<br />
wamedhulumu, ambayo ni mingi, kama i<strong>na</strong>vyoashiria kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke: ‘Miji<br />
120
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
mingapi?’ Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 8 (7:4).<br />
Ikaangukia<strong>na</strong> mapaa <strong>ya</strong>ke?<br />
Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 3 (2:259) <strong>na</strong> Juz. 15 (18:42).<br />
Na visima vilivyoachwa <strong>na</strong> makasri <strong>ya</strong>liyo madhubuti.<br />
Yote ha<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong>meachwa bila watu; <strong>ya</strong>ani miji <strong>ya</strong> madhalimu imekuwa<br />
mahame, hai<strong>na</strong> watu, ambapo hapo zamani ilikuwa imesheheni wenyeji <strong>na</strong><br />
wageni wa<strong>na</strong>oitembelea.<br />
Je, hawatemebei katika ardhi ili wapate akili za kuzingatia <strong>na</strong> masikio<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kusikilia?<br />
Wa<strong>na</strong>ambiwa wale waliomkadhibisha Muhammad (s.a.w.). Yaani hawapati<br />
funzo kwa waliyowafikia wakadhibishaji <strong>na</strong> kuo<strong>na</strong> jinsi miji <strong>ya</strong>o<br />
ilivyokuwa mitupu? Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 4 (3:137) <strong>na</strong> Juz.<br />
14 (16: 36).<br />
Kwani hakika si macho <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>yopofuka, lakini zi<strong>na</strong>zopofuka ni nyoyo<br />
zilizomo vifuani.<br />
Ku<strong>na</strong> faida gani <strong>ya</strong> kusikia <strong>na</strong> kuo<strong>na</strong> ikiwa moyo umepofuka? Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu<br />
masikio <strong>na</strong> macho ni nyenzo <strong>na</strong> akili ndio asili.<br />
Wa<strong>na</strong>kuharakisha ulete adhabu.<br />
Wa<strong>na</strong>ohimiza ni washirika<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>yehimizwa ni Muhammad (s.a.w.).<br />
Mtume alikuwa akiwapa kiaga cha adhabu ikiwa watang’ang’ania ushiriki<strong>na</strong>.<br />
Walikuwa wakisema <strong>ya</strong>le waliyosema waliowatangulia kuwaambia<br />
mitume kila wa<strong>na</strong>powakataza ushiriki<strong>na</strong>: “Tuletee u<strong>na</strong>yotuahidi ikiwa<br />
wewe ni mkweli.”<br />
121
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Na hakika Mwenyezi Mungu hakhalifu miadi <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Kuharakisha au kuchelewesha si muhimu madamu ahadi itakuwa. Kuwa<br />
hakika ni kuwa ahadi <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu kuwapa thawabu watiifu ni<br />
haki <strong>ya</strong> wale watiifu, hawezi kuihalifu. Ama ahadi <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
Mtukufu <strong>ya</strong> adhabu kwa waasi, hiyo ni haki <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu, akitaka<br />
a<strong>na</strong>weza kuitekeleza <strong>na</strong> akipenda a<strong>na</strong>weza kusamehe, ila ikiwa<br />
imetanguliwa <strong>na</strong> neno ‘Hatahalifu’ kama ilivyo katika A<strong>ya</strong> hii tuliyo <strong>na</strong>yo;<br />
ambapo amekanusha kutotekeleza aliyowaahidi makuraishi kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
msimamo wao kwa Mtume wa rehema.<br />
Na hakika siku moja kwa Mola wako ni kama miaka elfu m<strong>na</strong>vyohisabu.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) a<strong>na</strong>waambia washiriki<strong>na</strong>; ku<strong>na</strong> haja gani <strong>ya</strong><br />
kuharakisha adhabu <strong>ya</strong> Akhera <strong>na</strong> siku moja kwake ni kali kwenu kuliko<br />
adhabu <strong>ya</strong> miaka elfu katika miaka <strong>ya</strong> kiduniani? Kwa ufupi ni kuwa miaka<br />
elfu ni fumbo la vituko v<strong>ya</strong> siku <strong>ya</strong> mwisho.<br />
Ni miji mingapi nimeipa muda <strong>na</strong> hali ilikuwa imedhulumu, kisha<br />
nikaitia mkononi? Na kwangu mimi ndio marejeo yote.<br />
Umetangulia mfano wake katika <strong>Juzuu</strong> hii <strong>na</strong> Sura hii tuliyo <strong>na</strong>yo A<strong>ya</strong> 45<br />
<strong>na</strong> pia sehemu hii tuliyo <strong>na</strong>yo. Mwenyezi Mungu amerudia kwa kusisitiza<br />
<strong>na</strong> kutoa hadhari.<br />
Sema: Enyi watu! Hakika mimi ni muon<strong>ya</strong>ji kwenu niliye dhahiri.<br />
Huu ndio umuhimu wa mitume, kufikisha ujumbe <strong>na</strong> kutoa onyo kwa yule<br />
mwenye kuupinga. Maa<strong>na</strong> ha<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong>mekaririka kwa mifumo mbalimbali.<br />
Basi wale ambao wameamini <strong>na</strong> wakatenda mema, watapata maghufira<br />
<strong>na</strong> riziki za heshima.<br />
122
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ko wazi, <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>metangulia kwenye A<strong>ya</strong> kadha, ikiwemo Juz. 1<br />
(2:25).<br />
Na wa<strong>na</strong>ojitahidi kuzipinga A<strong>ya</strong> zetu hao ndio watu wa motoni.<br />
Yaani washiriki<strong>na</strong> wataingia motoni kwa muda usiokuwa <strong>na</strong> ukomo kwa<br />
<strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> kumfanyia i<strong>na</strong>di Mtume <strong>na</strong> kujitahidi kumpinga kufikisha<br />
ujumbe wa Mola wake <strong>na</strong> kuwazuilia <strong>na</strong>o watu.<br />
52. Na hatukumtuma kabla <strong>ya</strong>ko<br />
Mtume wala Nabii a<strong>na</strong>posoma<br />
ila shetani hutumbukiza<br />
katika masomo <strong>ya</strong>ke. Lakini<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu hu<strong>ya</strong>ondoa<br />
a<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>tumbukiza shetani;<br />
kisha Mwenyezi Mungu huzimakinisha<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> zake <strong>na</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ni Mjuzi,<br />
mwenye hekima.<br />
53. Ili alifanye lile alilolitumbukiza<br />
shetani ni mtihani kwa<br />
wale wenye maradhi katika<br />
nyoyo zao <strong>na</strong> wale ambao<br />
nyoyo zao zimesusuwaa. Na<br />
hakika madhalimu wamo<br />
katika uasi wa mbali.<br />
123
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
54. Ili wajue wale ambao<br />
wamepewa elimu kwamba<br />
hiyo ni haki itokayo kwa<br />
Mola wako <strong>na</strong> zinyenyekee<br />
kwake nyoyo zao. Na hakika<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ndiye<br />
awaongozaye wale ambao<br />
wameamini kwenye njia iliyonyooka.<br />
55. Na wale ambao wamekufuru<br />
hawataacha kuwa katika<br />
wasiwasi katika hilo mpaka<br />
saa iwafikie ghafla au<br />
iwafikie adhabu <strong>ya</strong> siku tasa.<br />
56. Ufalme siku hiyo ni wa<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu.<br />
Atahukumu bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>o. Basi<br />
wale ambao wameamini <strong>na</strong><br />
wakatenda mema, watakuwa<br />
katika Bustani zenye neema.<br />
57. Na wale ambao wamekufuru<br />
<strong>na</strong> wakazikadhibisha ishara<br />
zetu watapata adhabu ifedheheshayo.<br />
124
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
KUSOMA KWA MTUME NA KUJIINGIZA SHETANI<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 52 -57<br />
MAANA<br />
Na hatukumtuma kabla <strong>ya</strong>ko Mtume wala Nabii a<strong>na</strong>posoma ila<br />
shetani hutumbukiza katika masomo <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Wametofautia<strong>na</strong> wafasiri kuhusu neno Nabii <strong>na</strong> Mtume, (Nabiy <strong>na</strong> Rasul)*<br />
kuwa je, ni ibara zenye maa<strong>na</strong> moja au kila moja i<strong>na</strong> maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ke?<br />
Kauli iliyo karibu zaidi ni ile isemayo kuwa haku<strong>na</strong> tofauti bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ke;<br />
kwa vile kila mmoja kati <strong>ya</strong>o a<strong>na</strong>ta<strong>na</strong>bahishwa <strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu kwa<br />
lile a<strong>na</strong>lolitaka. Kwa hiyo akita<strong>na</strong>bahishwa <strong>na</strong> kuamrishwa kufikisha <strong>ya</strong>le<br />
aliyota<strong>na</strong>bahishwa, huyo a<strong>na</strong>itwa Nabii kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
amemta<strong>na</strong>bahisha <strong>na</strong> pia a<strong>na</strong>itwa Mtume kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
amemtumma kufikisha. Ikiwa amemta<strong>na</strong>bahisha tu bila <strong>ya</strong> kumwamuru<br />
kufikisha, basi huyo atakuwa ni Nabii tu. Hiyo ni kusema kuwa kila<br />
Mtume ni Nabii, lakini sio kila Nabii ni Mtume.<br />
Ku<strong>na</strong> riwa<strong>ya</strong> i<strong>na</strong>yosema kuwa <strong>saba</strong>bu <strong>ya</strong> kushuka A<strong>ya</strong> hii ni kwamba<br />
Mtume (s.a.w.) aliwasomea makuraishi Sura Najm, alipofikia kwenye A<strong>ya</strong><br />
isemayo:<br />
“Je, mmewao<strong>na</strong> Lata <strong>na</strong> Uzza <strong>na</strong> Ma<strong>na</strong>ta mwingine wa tatu” (53: 19 – 20)<br />
basi shetani aliingiza katika kisomo cha Mtume maneno ha<strong>ya</strong>: “Hao ni<br />
wazuri watukufu <strong>na</strong> kwamba maombezi <strong>ya</strong>o bila shaka <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>tarajiwa,” <strong>ya</strong>ni<br />
ha<strong>ya</strong> masa<strong>na</strong>mu ni mazuri <strong>na</strong> uombezi wao u<strong>na</strong>tarajiwa kwa Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu.<br />
*Neno <strong>na</strong>biy li<strong>na</strong>maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kuta<strong>na</strong>baishwa <strong>na</strong> rasul li<strong>na</strong> maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kutumwa -<br />
Mtarjumu.<br />
125
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Maulama wahakiki wamekanusha riwa<strong>ya</strong> hii <strong>na</strong> wakakata kauli kuwa hiyo<br />
ni miongoni mwa uzushi wa wazandiki wa<strong>na</strong>otaka kukitia ila Kitabu cha<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> utume wa Muhammad (s.a.w.). Wametegemea, katika<br />
hilo, kwenye dalili mkataa za kiakili <strong>na</strong> ki<strong>na</strong>kili. Mtume ambaye ametumwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu kupiga vita ushiriki<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> kuabudu mizimu,<br />
halafu huyo huyo arudi kuisifia kwa sifa za ukamilifu! Vipi iwe hivyo <strong>na</strong><br />
ulimi wa Mtume u<strong>na</strong>mtarjumu <strong>na</strong> kumbainisha Mwenyezi Mungu? Shetani<br />
a<strong>na</strong>weza kupata <strong>na</strong>fasi kwenye ubainifu <strong>na</strong> tafsiri hii <strong>ya</strong> kimungu?<br />
Usahihi wa maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> ni kuwa ukomo wa usomaji wa Mtume yeyote,<br />
ni kuwafahamisha watu uhakika wa risala <strong>ya</strong>ke ili waweze kuifahamu <strong>na</strong><br />
kuongoka <strong>na</strong>yo, lakini wenye tamaa wa<strong>na</strong>ingilia kati kwa kuvungavunga<br />
<strong>na</strong> kueneza kila ai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> propaganda. Ha<strong>ya</strong> tume<strong>ya</strong>shuhudia <strong>na</strong> ku<strong>ya</strong>o<strong>na</strong><br />
hasa. Ha<strong>ya</strong> ndio maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kutumbukiza shetani katika usomi wa Nabii.<br />
Nabii a<strong>na</strong>watakia heri watu <strong>na</strong> shetani muharibifu a<strong>na</strong>wazuia wasiipate.<br />
Lakini Mwenyezi Mungu hu<strong>ya</strong>ondoa a<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>tumbukiza shetani;<br />
kisha Mwenyezi Mungu huzimakinisha A<strong>ya</strong> zake <strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
ni Mjuzi, mwenye hekima.<br />
Wabatilifu wa<strong>na</strong>unda njama <strong>na</strong> kuzitangaza, lakini Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
huondoa ubatilifu wao <strong>na</strong> kuufedhehi uwongo wao kwenye ndimi za wakweli<br />
<strong>na</strong> mikononi mwa wapigania jihadi. A<strong>ya</strong> nyingine yenye maa<strong>na</strong> hii ni<br />
ile isemayo:<br />
“Wa<strong>na</strong>taka kuizima nuru <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu kwa vinywav<strong>ya</strong>o. Na<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu amekataa isipokuwa kuitimiza nuru <strong>ya</strong>ke, ijapokuwa<br />
makafiri wamechukia.” Juz.10 (9:32).<br />
126
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Ili alifanye lile alilolitumbukiza shetani ni mtihani kwa wale wenye<br />
maradhi katika nyoyo zao <strong>na</strong> wale ambao nyoyo zao zimesusuwaa.<br />
Wenye maradhi katika nyoyo ni wezi wa<strong>na</strong>oishi kwa un<strong>ya</strong>ng’anyi, uporaji,<br />
ghushi <strong>na</strong> utapeli. Ama waliosusuwaa nyoyo zao ni wale ambao ni bendera<br />
hufuata upepo. Maa<strong>na</strong> ni kuwa kampeni za uwongo hazi<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong>fasi<br />
isipokuwa kwa wezi <strong>na</strong> walio <strong>na</strong> bendera.<br />
Popote utakapoelekea utakuta picha hii waziwazi; hasa kwenye magazeti,<br />
idhaa, vitabu, michezo <strong>ya</strong> kuigiza <strong>na</strong> katika mazungumzo <strong>ya</strong> vibaraka <strong>na</strong><br />
wale wa<strong>na</strong>odanganywa ambao wa<strong>na</strong>amini kila wa<strong>na</strong>yoambiwa bila <strong>ya</strong><br />
kuchunguza; te<strong>na</strong> ni wengi.<br />
Kisha kampeni za uwongo, hata kama zitakuwa zi<strong>na</strong> madhara kwa upande<br />
fulani, lakini zi<strong>na</strong> manufaa kwa upande mwingine. Kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu zi<strong>na</strong>mtambulisha<br />
muhaini <strong>na</strong> mwenye ikhlasi, vile vile mjinga <strong>na</strong> mjuzi. Ha<strong>ya</strong><br />
ndio makusudio <strong>ya</strong> neno mtihani.<br />
Na hakika madhalimu wamo katika uasi wa mbali.<br />
Kila mwenye kuvungavunga <strong>na</strong> akafan<strong>ya</strong> uzushi basi ni dhalimu, <strong>na</strong> kila<br />
mwenye kuusadikisha uwongo <strong>na</strong> uzushi bila <strong>ya</strong> kuuchuunguza pia huyo<br />
ni dhalimu.<br />
Ili wajue wale ambao wamepewa elimu kwamba hiyo ni haki itokayo<br />
kwa Mola wako <strong>na</strong> zinyenyekee kwake nyoyo zao.<br />
Neno ‘hiyo’ hapa ni hiyo Qur’an. Pia i<strong>na</strong>weza kufasirika ‘huyo’ kwa<br />
maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> huyo Nabii.<br />
Maa<strong>na</strong> ni kuwa, ikiwa mtu atasadikisha uwongo juu <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
<strong>na</strong> Mtume wake, basi wenye maarifa <strong>na</strong> ikhlasi, wa<strong>na</strong>jua hakika <strong>ya</strong> uwongo<br />
<strong>na</strong> uzushi huo; jambo ambalo li<strong>na</strong>wazidishia imani <strong>na</strong> mshikamano kwa<br />
127
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu, mitume <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> vitabu v<strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> pia unyenyekevu kwa<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu.<br />
Na hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ndiye awaongozaye wale ambao<br />
wameamini kwenye njia iliyonyooka.<br />
A<strong>na</strong>waongoza Mwenyezi Mungu kwenye njia <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> kuifuata kwa<br />
kujikurubisha kwake hata kukiwa <strong>na</strong> kampeni za uwongo <strong>na</strong> vikwazo kiasi<br />
gani.<br />
Na wale ambao wamekufuru hawataacha kuwa katika wasiwasi katika<br />
hilo mpaka saa iwafikie ghafla au iwafikie adhabu <strong>ya</strong> siku tasa.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> saa ni ile saa <strong>ya</strong> kutoka watu kuelekea kwa Mola wao wakitokea<br />
makaburini (Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma). Siku tasa ni siku <strong>ya</strong> hisabu. Utasa ni ki<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong><br />
cha makafiri kukata tamaa <strong>ya</strong> kuokoka.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) kueleza, katika A<strong>ya</strong> iliyotangulia,<br />
kuwa wenye elimu wa<strong>na</strong>amini Qur’an <strong>na</strong> utume wa Muhammad (s.a.w.),<br />
kwenye A<strong>ya</strong> hii a<strong>na</strong>sema kuwa makafiri wako katika shaka kuhusu Mtume<br />
wa Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> watendelea kuwa katika shaka hiyo mpaka siku<br />
<strong>ya</strong> kufufuliwa kwao makaburini au siku <strong>ya</strong> kusimama kwao mbele <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu kwa hisabu. Na hapo ndipo itawafichukia hakika <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong><br />
watajua kuwa wao walikuwa kwenye upotevu.<br />
Ufalme siku hiyo ni wa Mwenyezi Mungu peke <strong>ya</strong>ke, haku<strong>na</strong> kadhi au<br />
amiri wala raisi au waziri; kama ilivyo katika maisha ha<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong> duniani.<br />
Atahukumu bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>o. Yaani bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> makafiri <strong>na</strong> waumini.<br />
Basi wale ambao wameamini <strong>na</strong> wakatenda mema, watakuwa katika<br />
Bustani zenye neema. Na wale ambao wamekufuru <strong>na</strong> wakazikadhibisha<br />
ishara zetu watapata adhabu ifedheheshayo.<br />
Hawa watapata hiza<strong>ya</strong> <strong>na</strong> moto <strong>na</strong> wale watapata Pepo <strong>na</strong> raha. Mfano wa<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> hizi umekwishatangulia mara nyingi.<br />
128
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
58. Wale ambao wamehajiri katika<br />
njia <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu,<br />
kisha wakuawa au wakafa,<br />
bila shaka Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
atawaruzuku riziki njema. Na<br />
hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
mbora wa wa<strong>na</strong>oruzuku.<br />
59. Bila shaka atawaingiza<br />
mahali watakapoparidhia, <strong>na</strong><br />
hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
Mjuzi, Mpole.<br />
60. Ndivyo hivyo. Na a<strong>na</strong>yelipiza<br />
mfano wa alivyoadhibiwa,<br />
kisha akadhulumiwa, bila<br />
shaka Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
atamnusuru. Na hakika<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ni Mwingi<br />
wa msamaha, Mwingi wa<br />
maghufira.<br />
61. Hayo ni kwa kuwa Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu huuingiza mcha<strong>na</strong><br />
katika usiku <strong>na</strong> huuingiza<br />
usiku katika mcha<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
kwamba Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
mwenye kusikia, mwenye<br />
kuo<strong>na</strong>.<br />
129
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
62. Hayo ni kwa kuwa Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu ndiye wa kweli, <strong>na</strong><br />
kwamba wale wa<strong>na</strong>owaomba<br />
badala <strong>ya</strong>ke ni batili, <strong>na</strong> hakika<br />
Mwenyzi Mungu ndiye<br />
aliye juu, Mkubwa.<br />
63. Je huoni kwamba Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu huteremsha maji<br />
kutoka mbinguni <strong>na</strong> mara<br />
ardhi i<strong>na</strong>kuwa chanikiwiti.<br />
Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
Mpole, Mwenye habari.<br />
64. Ni v<strong>ya</strong>ke vilivyomo mbinguni<br />
<strong>na</strong> vilivyomo ardhini. Na<br />
hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
mwenye kujitosha, Mwenye<br />
kusifiwa.<br />
WALIOHAJIRI<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 58 – 64<br />
MAANA<br />
Wale ambao wamehajiri katika njia <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu, kisha<br />
wakuawa au wakafa, bila shaka Mwenyezi Mungu atawaruzuku riziki<br />
njema. Na hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni mbora wa wa<strong>na</strong>oruzuku.<br />
130
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Hijra (kuhama) katika njia <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu ziko ai<strong>na</strong> nyingi.<br />
Miongoni mwazo ni hizi zifuatazo:-<br />
Kuhama mtu kwao kwenda kupiga<strong>na</strong> jihadi <strong>na</strong> madhalimu <strong>na</strong> wapotevu.<br />
Kukimbia mtu <strong>na</strong> dini <strong>ya</strong>ke kuepuka vikwazo v<strong>ya</strong> kumzuia kutekeleza<br />
wajibu wake.<br />
Kuhama kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> kutafuta elimu <strong>ya</strong> dini kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> dini, kutafuta<br />
riziki halali au kutekeleza faradhi <strong>ya</strong> Hijja.<br />
Yeyote miongoni mwa hawa <strong>na</strong> mfano wao, akiuawa au akifa katika<br />
kuhama kwake huko, basi atastahiki, mbele <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu, kupata<br />
malipo <strong>na</strong> riziki njema, kama wa<strong>na</strong>vyostahiki mashahidi.<br />
Tumezungumzia Hijra kwa ufafanuzi zaidi katika Juz. 4 (3: (190 -195) <strong>na</strong><br />
Juz.5 (97-100).<br />
Bila shaka atawaingiza mahali watakapoparidhia, <strong>na</strong> hakika<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ni Mjuzi, Mpole.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> mahali hapa ni Peponi. Kwa dhahiri ni kuwa mwenye kuiingia<br />
hataridhia pengine zaidi <strong>ya</strong> hapo.<br />
Ndivyo hivyo.<br />
Yaani hivyo alivyosema Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) kwamba mwenye<br />
kuhama katika njia <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> akuawa au akafa, kuwa atapata <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>yomridhisha<br />
kutoka kwa kwa Mola wake.<br />
Na a<strong>na</strong>yelipiza mfano wa alivyoadhibiwa, <strong>ya</strong>ani mwenye kupiga<strong>na</strong><br />
kujikinga. Kisha akadhulumiwa, si kwa lolote isipokuwa amekataa kudhulumiwa<br />
<strong>na</strong> kuchokozwa, bila shaka Mwenyezi Mungu atamnusuru.<br />
Yaani Mwenyezi Mungu atamsaidia mwenye kudhulumiwa <strong>na</strong> atamlipizia<br />
kisasi.<br />
131
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Na hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni Mwingi wa msamaha, Mwingi wa<br />
maghufira.<br />
Hapa ku<strong>na</strong> ishara kuwa msamaha kwa mkosaji ni jambo li<strong>na</strong>lopendeza<br />
kwa Mwenyezi Mungu ikiwa mtu amemkosea Mwenyezi Mungu hasa,<br />
lakini haki <strong>ya</strong> umma hai<strong>na</strong> msamaha.<br />
Hayo ni kwa kuwa Mwenyezi Mungu huuingiza mcha<strong>na</strong> katika usiku<br />
<strong>na</strong> huuingiza usiku katika mcha<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> kwamba Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
mwenye kusikia, mwenye kuo<strong>na</strong>.<br />
Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 3 (3:27).<br />
Wafasiri wametaja njia nyingi za kuunganisha A<strong>ya</strong> hii <strong>na</strong> iliyo kabla <strong>ya</strong>ke,<br />
lakini hawakuleta jambo la kutuliza moyo. Katika utangulizi wa <strong>Juzuu</strong> <strong>ya</strong><br />
kwanza tulidokeza kwamba Qur’an si kitabu cha fani cha kuwa <strong>na</strong> milango<br />
maalumu <strong>ya</strong> maudhui; isipokuwa ni kitabu cha uongofu <strong>na</strong> mawaidha.<br />
Ki<strong>na</strong>kugurisha kutoka jambo hili hadi jingine. Imam <strong>Al</strong>i (a.s.) a<strong>na</strong>sema:<br />
“Hakika A<strong>ya</strong> i<strong>na</strong>kuwa <strong>na</strong> jambo mwanzoni mwake <strong>na</strong> mwisho wake<br />
i<strong>na</strong>kuwa <strong>na</strong> jambo jingine.”<br />
Hayo ni kwa kuwa Mwenyezi Mungu ndiye wa kweli, <strong>na</strong> kwamba wale<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>owaomba badala <strong>ya</strong>ke ni batili, <strong>na</strong> hakika Mwenyzi Mungu ndiye<br />
aliye juu, Mkubwa.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ni haki kwa kudumu dhati <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> utukufu wa sifa zake,<br />
Yuko juu kwa vile haku<strong>na</strong> mtawala zaidi <strong>ya</strong> utawala wake <strong>na</strong> ni Mkubwa<br />
ambaye amekienea kila kitu kiujuzi <strong>na</strong> kihuruma.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> kutaja sifa zote ni kuwa Mwenyezi Mungu huwanusuru<br />
wenye takua <strong>na</strong> huwafedhehesha wale waliokufuru <strong>na</strong> kufan<strong>ya</strong> ufisadi ardhini.<br />
132
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Je huoni kwamba Mwenyezi Mungu huteremsha maji kutoka mbinguni<br />
<strong>na</strong> mara ardhi i<strong>na</strong>kuwa chanikiwiti. Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
Mpole, Mwenye habari.<br />
Umetangulia mfano wake katika A<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong> 5 <strong>ya</strong> Sura hii <strong>na</strong> pia kwenye Juz.<br />
2 (2: 164).<br />
Ni v<strong>ya</strong>ke vilivyomo mbinguni <strong>na</strong> vilivyomo ardhini. Na hakika<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ni mwenye kujitosha, Mwenye kusifiwa.<br />
Hahitajii walimwengu <strong>na</strong> ni msifiwa wa wa<strong>na</strong>osifiwa. Katika Najul-balagha<br />
imesemwa: “Yeye ni mwenye kujitosha bila <strong>ya</strong> kutaka kufaidika,”<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ani kwamba utajiri wake ni wa kidhati sio wa ku<strong>na</strong>sibishwa <strong>na</strong> kwamba<br />
yeye lau angelihitajia kitu asingelikuwa ni Mungu. Ibn <strong>Al</strong>-Arabi a<strong>na</strong>sema,<br />
katika kitabu Futuhatul-makkiy<strong>ya</strong>: “Haku<strong>na</strong> wa kusifiwa isipokuwa<br />
a<strong>na</strong>yesifiwa <strong>na</strong> mwenye sifa.” Yaani Mwenyezi Mungu ndiye mwenye<br />
sifa; kwamba haku<strong>na</strong> mwenye kustahiki sifa ila aliyesifiwa <strong>na</strong> Mungu au<br />
kuridhia asifiwe.<br />
65. Je, huoni kwamba Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu amewadhalilishia<br />
vilivyomo ardhini <strong>na</strong> majahazi<br />
<strong>ya</strong>pitayo baharini kwa<br />
amri zake. Na a<strong>na</strong>zizuia<br />
mbingu zisianguke juu <strong>ya</strong><br />
ardhi isipokuwa kwa idhini<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke. Hakika Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu kwa watu ni Mpole,<br />
Mwenye kurehemu.<br />
133
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
66. Naye ndiye ambaye amewahuisha<br />
kisha atawafisha<br />
kisha atawahuisha. Hakika<br />
mtu ni mwenye kukufuru<br />
sa<strong>na</strong>.<br />
67. Kila umma tumeujalia sharia<br />
wa<strong>na</strong>zozifuata. Basi wasizozane<br />
<strong>na</strong>we katika jambo<br />
hili. Na lingania kwa Mola<br />
wako; hakika wewe uko katika<br />
uongofu ulionyooka.<br />
68. Na wakikujadili, basi sema:<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong>jua<br />
zaidi m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>tenda.<br />
69. Mwenyezi Mungu atahukumu<br />
bai<strong>na</strong> yenu siku <strong>ya</strong><br />
Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma katika hayo m<strong>na</strong>yohitilafia<strong>na</strong>.<br />
70. Je, hujui kwamba Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu a<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong>jua <strong>ya</strong>liyomo<br />
mbinguni <strong>na</strong> ardhini? Hakika<br />
hayo <strong>ya</strong>mo kitabuni. Hakika<br />
hayo kwa Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu ni mepesi.<br />
134
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
ANAZUIA MBINGU<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 65 – 70<br />
MAANA<br />
Je, huoni kwamba Mwenyezi Mungu amewadhalilishia vilivyomo ardhini<br />
<strong>na</strong> majahazi <strong>ya</strong>pitayo baharini kwa amri zake.<br />
Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 13 (14: 32) <strong>na</strong> Juz. 14 (16: 14).<br />
Na a<strong>na</strong>zizuia mbingu zisianguke juu <strong>ya</strong> ardhi isipokuwa kwa idhini<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke. Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni mwenye huruma kwa watu.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu amezizuia kwa ‘nguvu <strong>ya</strong> mvutano’; kama a<strong>na</strong>vyowazuia<br />
ndege kwa mbawa zao. Ametegemeza kwake Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
kuzuia, kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu yeye ndiye muumba wa ulimwengu <strong>na</strong> m<strong>saba</strong>bishaji<br />
wa <strong>saba</strong>bu.<br />
Katika baadhi <strong>ya</strong> A<strong>ya</strong>, Mwenyezi Mungu, ameleta ibara <strong>ya</strong> <strong>saba</strong>bu hizo<br />
kwa neno, mikononi mwa Mwenyezi Mungu; kama vile:<br />
“Je, hawaoni kuwa tumewaumbia katika vile ilivyofan<strong>ya</strong> mikono yetu,<br />
wan<strong>ya</strong>ma <strong>na</strong>o wa<strong>na</strong>wamiliki” (36:71)<br />
“Akasema te<strong>na</strong>: Ewe Iblis! Ni kipi kilichokuzuia kumsujudia yule niliyemuumba<br />
kwa mikono <strong>ya</strong>ngu?” (38:75).<br />
Kwa vyovyote iwavyo ni kwamba lengo la kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu:<br />
135
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
‘Na a<strong>na</strong>zizuia mbingu...’ ni kuashiria kwamba ni lazima mtu afikirie sa<strong>na</strong><br />
katika kuumbwa ulimwengu, <strong>na</strong> jinsi Mwenyezi Mungu alivyoupangilia<br />
kwa uweza wake <strong>na</strong> hekima <strong>ya</strong>ke. Lau si hekima <strong>na</strong> mpangilio huu,<br />
ulimwengu ungeliharibika <strong>na</strong> sa<strong>ya</strong>ri zote zingekuwa bure tu.<br />
Naye ndiye ambaye amewahuisha kisha atawafisha kisha<br />
atawahuisha. Hakika mtu ni mwenye kukufuru sa<strong>na</strong>.<br />
Umepita mfano wake katika Juz. 1 (2: 28) kifungu cha ‘Mauti <strong>na</strong> uhai mara<br />
mbili.’<br />
Ama wasifu wa mtu kuwa ni mwenye kukufuru sa<strong>na</strong>, dhalimu sa<strong>na</strong>,<br />
mwenye kujifaharisha sa<strong>na</strong> n.k. sio kuwa ni kuelezea hakika <strong>ya</strong>ke yote<br />
ilivyo, isipokuwa ni kutafsiri silika <strong>ya</strong>ke katika baadhi <strong>ya</strong> misimamo <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Angalia Juz.12 (11:9).<br />
Kila umma tumeujalia sharia wa<strong>na</strong>zozifuata.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> umma ni watu wa dini. Neno sharia tumelifasiri kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
neno mansaka, ambalo li<strong>na</strong> maa<strong>na</strong> mbalimbali; miongoni mwazo ni:<br />
Mn<strong>ya</strong>ma a<strong>na</strong>yechinjwa kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu, kama ilivyo katika<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 34 <strong>ya</strong> Sura hii tuliyo <strong>na</strong>yo. Maa<strong>na</strong> nyingine ni mahali pa ibada. Pia li<strong>na</strong><br />
maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> sharia <strong>na</strong> njia, ambayo ndiyo <strong>ya</strong>liyokusudiwa hapa, kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong><br />
kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu iliyokuja moja kwa moja baada <strong>ya</strong> neno hilo:<br />
Basi wasizozane <strong>na</strong>we katika jambo hili.<br />
Yaani maadamu kila watu wa dini wa<strong>na</strong> sharia zao <strong>na</strong> njia wanzozifuata,<br />
basi watu wa dini nyingine wasikuletee mzozo kwenye Uislamu <strong>na</strong> sharia<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke. Sharia <strong>ya</strong> Tawrat <strong>na</strong> i<strong>na</strong>jili ni kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> waliopita, lakini sharia <strong>ya</strong><br />
Qur’an ni kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> watu wa sasa <strong>na</strong> watakaofuatia hadi siku <strong>ya</strong> ufufuo.<br />
Na lingania kwa Mola wako wala usijishughulishe <strong>na</strong> upinzani wa wapinzani<br />
wala mizozo.<br />
136
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Hakika wewe uko katika uongofu ulionyooka.<br />
Na atakayefuata muongozo wako hatapotea wala kuwa muovu.<br />
Na wakikujadili, basi sema: Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong>jua zaidi m<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>tenda.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu atahukumu bai<strong>na</strong> yenu siku <strong>ya</strong> Ki<strong>ya</strong>ma katika<br />
hayo m<strong>na</strong>yohitilafia<strong>na</strong>.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu alimwamrisha Mtume wake aendelee <strong>na</strong> mwito wake,<br />
aachane <strong>na</strong>o wenye mizozo <strong>na</strong> i<strong>na</strong>di <strong>na</strong> awaambie kuwa Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
a<strong>na</strong>jua matendo yetu <strong>na</strong> yenu <strong>na</strong> yupi aliyeongoka kati yetu sisi <strong>na</strong> nyinyi.<br />
Na Yeye ndiye hakimu siku <strong>ya</strong> hukumu. Huko mtajua ni yupi mwenye haki<br />
<strong>na</strong> mwenye batili.<br />
Je, hujui kwamba Mwenyezi Mungu a<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong>jua <strong>ya</strong>liyomo mbinguni <strong>na</strong><br />
ardhini? Hakika hayo <strong>ya</strong>mo kitabuni.<br />
Maneno <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>elekezwa kwa Mtume (s.a.w.). Makusudio ni kuwakemea<br />
makafiri kwamba waliyo<strong>ya</strong>sema <strong>na</strong> wa<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>dhamiria katika kufuru <strong>na</strong><br />
vitimbi kwa Nabii wa Mungu <strong>ya</strong>mesajiliwa <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>ko kwake, atahisabu <strong>na</strong><br />
atawalipa wa<strong>na</strong>yostahiki. Hakika hayo kwa Mwenyezi Mungu ni mepesi.<br />
71. Na wa<strong>na</strong>abudu badala <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ambavyo<br />
hakuviteremshia dalili <strong>na</strong><br />
ambavyo hawa<strong>na</strong> ujuzi<br />
<strong>na</strong>vyo. Na madhalimu<br />
hawatakuwa <strong>na</strong> wa kuwasaidia.<br />
137
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
72. Na wa<strong>na</strong>posomewa A<strong>ya</strong> zetu<br />
zilizo wazi utao<strong>na</strong> chuki kati-<br />
ka nyuso za waliokufuru;<br />
hukaribia kuwavamia wale<br />
wanowasomea A<strong>ya</strong> zetu.<br />
Sema: Je, niwaambiye <strong>ya</strong>liyo<br />
maba<strong>ya</strong> zaidi kuliko ha<strong>ya</strong>? Ni<br />
moto wa Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
aliowaahidi waliokufuru, <strong>na</strong><br />
ni marudio maba<strong>ya</strong> hayo.<br />
73. Enyi watu! Umepigwa mfano,<br />
basi usikilizeni. Hakika wale<br />
m<strong>na</strong>owaomba badala <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu hawatoumba<br />
nzi wajapojumuika kwa<br />
hilo. Na nzi akiwapokon<strong>ya</strong><br />
kitu hawawezi kukipata<br />
kwake. Amedhoofika atakaye<br />
<strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>yetakiwa.<br />
74. Hawakumkadiria Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu haki <strong>ya</strong> kadiri <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni<br />
138
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Mwenye nguvu, Mwenye<br />
kushinda.<br />
75. Mwenyezi Mungu huteua<br />
wajumbe miongoni mwa<br />
Malaika <strong>na</strong> miongoni mwa<br />
watu. Hakika Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu ni Mwenye kusikia,<br />
Mwenye kuo<strong>na</strong>.<br />
76. A<strong>na</strong>jua <strong>ya</strong>liyo mbele <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong><br />
<strong>ya</strong>liyo nyuma <strong>ya</strong>o. Na kwa<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>ya</strong>tarejeshwa<br />
mambo yote.<br />
WANAABUDU ASIYEKUWA MUNGU<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 71 – 76<br />
MAANA<br />
Na wa<strong>na</strong>abudu badala <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu ambavyo hakuviteremshia<br />
dalili <strong>na</strong> ambavyo hawa<strong>na</strong> ujuzi <strong>na</strong>vyo.<br />
Kujua kitu chochote ni lazima kuwe ama kwa msingi ulio wazi, ambako<br />
mtu a<strong>na</strong>pata kujua, kwa kiasi tu cha kuleta picha <strong>ya</strong>ke; kwa mfano kujua<br />
kuwa pembe tatu sio mraba <strong>na</strong> mraba sio mduara. Au kuwe kwa <strong>na</strong>dharia;<br />
mfano kuwa ardhi i<strong>na</strong>zunguka kandokando <strong>ya</strong> jua.<br />
Kwa hiyo makusudio <strong>ya</strong> dalili hapa ni dalili za <strong>na</strong>dharia <strong>na</strong> makusudio <strong>ya</strong><br />
ujuzi ni misingi iliyo wazi. Yaani washiriki<strong>na</strong> wameabudu masa<strong>na</strong>mu <strong>na</strong><br />
mengineyo bila <strong>ya</strong> kutegemea <strong>na</strong>dharia yoyote au kwenye msingi wowote.<br />
139
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Wamemdhulumu Mwenyezi Mungu kwa kuabudu masa<strong>na</strong>mu kwa kumfanyia<br />
washirika <strong>na</strong> wamejidhulumu wenyewe kwa kujiweka kwenye<br />
ghadhabu za Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> adhabu <strong>ya</strong>ke. Na madhalimu<br />
hawatakuwa <strong>na</strong> wakuwasaidia siku <strong>ya</strong> hisabu <strong>na</strong> malipo.<br />
Na wa<strong>na</strong>posomewa A<strong>ya</strong> zetu zilizo wazi utao<strong>na</strong> chuki katika nyuso za<br />
waliokufuru. Hukaribia kuwavamia wale wanowasomea A<strong>ya</strong> zetu.<br />
Wa<strong>na</strong>osomewa ni wale wanoabudu asiyekuwa Mwenyezi Mungu.<br />
Walikuwa wa<strong>na</strong>pomsikia Mtume (s.a.w.) au waumini wakiwasomea<br />
Qur’an au hoja nyinginezo basi nyuso zao zi<strong>na</strong>geuka kwa chuki <strong>na</strong><br />
wa<strong>na</strong>kusudia kuwavamia wale wa<strong>na</strong>owasikia.<br />
Sema: Je, niwaambiye <strong>ya</strong>liyo maba<strong>ya</strong> zaidi kuliko ha<strong>ya</strong>? Ni moto<br />
Mwenyzi Mungu aliowaahidi waliokufuru, <strong>na</strong> ni marudio maba<strong>ya</strong><br />
hayo.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) alimwamuru Mtume wake mtukufu, kuwaambia<br />
hao wenye hasira, ikiwa ni uzito kwenu kusikiliza haki, basi moto wa<br />
Jahan<strong>na</strong>m kwenu ni mkali <strong>na</strong> mkubwa zaidi.<br />
WAJIHI NA MTAZAMO WA MACHO.<br />
Haku<strong>na</strong> kitu kizito kwa mvunjifu kuliko tamko la haki, <strong>na</strong> ushindi wa watu<br />
wa haki; hasa pale a<strong>na</strong>poshindwa mvunjifu kuizuwia haki. Atan<strong>ya</strong>maza<br />
huku akijifan<strong>ya</strong> hajali, lakini dalili zi<strong>na</strong>zoakisi usoni mwake <strong>na</strong> mtazamo<br />
wa macho <strong>ya</strong>ke zi<strong>na</strong>mfedhehesha.<br />
Mtu a<strong>na</strong>weza kuwa muongo <strong>na</strong> kuwadangan<strong>ya</strong> watu katika kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong><br />
vitendo v<strong>ya</strong>ke, kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu a<strong>na</strong> uwezo wa kuufan<strong>ya</strong> ulimi wake <strong>na</strong> kuuzunguusha<br />
vile atakavyo. Vilevile mikono <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> miguu <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> huipeleka<br />
vile atakavyo. Ingawaje harakati za ulimi kwake ni jambo jepesi, lakini<br />
ku<strong>na</strong> kitu kimoja tu, hawezi kukihukumu vile atakavyo.<br />
140
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Kitu chenyewe ni moyo, uwe mzima au mbovu. Akipenda au kuchukia,<br />
athari <strong>ya</strong>ke hudhihiri usoni <strong>na</strong> machoni waziwazi. Haziwezi kufichwa <strong>na</strong><br />
tabasamu la kutengeneza wala maneno <strong>ya</strong> kutiwa asali. Ndio maa<strong>na</strong> ikawa<br />
kipimo sahihi cha undani wa bi<strong>na</strong>damu sio maneno <strong>na</strong> vitendo.<br />
Enyi watu! Umepigwa mfano, basi usikilizeni. Hakika wale<br />
m<strong>na</strong>owaomba badala <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu hawatoumba nzi wajapojumuika<br />
kwa hilo. Na nzi akiwapokon<strong>ya</strong> kitu hawawezi kukipata<br />
kwake.<br />
Baada <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) kutaja kwamba washiriki<strong>na</strong> wame<strong>ya</strong>pa<br />
masa<strong>na</strong>mu <strong>ya</strong>o sifa za uungu, bila <strong>ya</strong> dalili, ametaja katika A<strong>ya</strong> hii, dalili<br />
za kihisia kukanusha sifa hii, ambazo a<strong>na</strong>weza kuzifahamu mjinga <strong>na</strong> hata<br />
mtoto pia: kwamba nzi ni kiumbe dhaifu, lakini lau nzi atachukua kitu<br />
kutoka kwenye masa<strong>na</strong>mu, kisha masa<strong>na</strong>mu hayo <strong>ya</strong>kusanyike <strong>na</strong><br />
<strong>ya</strong>tangaze vita dhidi <strong>ya</strong> nzi kutaka kurudisha <strong>ya</strong>lichon<strong>ya</strong>ng’anywa, nzi<br />
angelikuwa ni mshindi; sikwambii te<strong>na</strong> kuweza kuumba huyo nzi au hata<br />
kuumba ubawa wake.<br />
Amedhoofika atakaye <strong>na</strong>ye ni sa<strong>na</strong>mu <strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>yetakiwa ambaye ni nzi.<br />
Kwa hiyo vipi <strong>ya</strong>takuwa masa<strong>na</strong>mu ni Mungu.<br />
U<strong>na</strong>weza kuuliza kuwa masa<strong>na</strong>mu hayo yenyewe ta<strong>ya</strong>ri ni dalili kuwa sio<br />
Mungu, sasa vipi Qur’an imejishughulisha ku<strong>ya</strong>letea dalili?<br />
Jibu: Ni kweli kuwa kukanusha uungu wa masa<strong>na</strong>mu ni katika mambo<br />
<strong>ya</strong>liyo wazi kiakili, lakini wale walio<strong>ya</strong>abudu hawaku<strong>ya</strong>abudu kwa msukumo<br />
wa kiakili; isipokuwa ni kwa misukumo mingine; kama vile malezi,<br />
uigaji, maslahi <strong>na</strong> mingineyo ambayo haikubali kukosolewa kwa <strong>na</strong>m<strong>na</strong><br />
yoyote ile.<br />
KUHUSU ITIKADI YA TAWHDI<br />
Wakati nikifasiri A<strong>ya</strong> za Qur’an yenye hekima, nimetambua kwamba kila<br />
ni<strong>na</strong>poendelea kufasiri, Mwenyezi Mungu hunifungulia milango mingine<br />
141
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
<strong>ya</strong> maarifa <strong>ya</strong> siri za Qur’an <strong>na</strong> maajabu <strong>ya</strong>ke isiyokuwa <strong>na</strong> kiasi.<br />
Ku<strong>na</strong> A<strong>ya</strong> nyingi zi<strong>na</strong>zokaririka, katika Kitabu cha Mwenyezi Mungu,<br />
kimatamshi <strong>na</strong> kimaa<strong>na</strong> ambazo mara <strong>ya</strong> kwanza ni<strong>na</strong>zifafanua kwa nilivyofahamu<br />
kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> tamko lenyewe au mfumo wa maneno n.k. Mara <strong>ya</strong><br />
pili ni<strong>na</strong>unganisaha A<strong>ya</strong> iliyokaririka <strong>na</strong> ile iliyopita huku nikitaja <strong>na</strong>mba<br />
<strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> Sura <strong>ya</strong>ke au ni<strong>na</strong>ifasiri kwa mfumo mwingine. Ni<strong>na</strong>poifasiri mara<br />
<strong>ya</strong> pili au <strong>ya</strong> tatu huwa ni<strong>na</strong>gundua upande ambao ulifichika kwangu hapo<br />
mwanzo <strong>na</strong> kwa wafasiri wengine wote niliowaangalia.<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> nyingi zaidi zi<strong>na</strong>zokaririka katika Kitabu cha Mwenyezi Mungu ni zile<br />
zi<strong>na</strong>zofahamisha umoja wa Muumba <strong>na</strong> kupinga ushiriki<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> watu wake.<br />
Hayo Mwenyezi Mungu ame<strong>ya</strong>taja kwa kila mfumo <strong>na</strong> kwa sura mbalimbali.<br />
Nimezungumzia Tawhid <strong>na</strong> kukanusha ushiriki<strong>na</strong> katika Juz. 5 (4: 48 – 50)<br />
kwa anuani <strong>ya</strong> ‘Dalili <strong>ya</strong> umoja <strong>na</strong> utatu.’ Kisha nikarudia maudhui hayo<br />
kwa mfumo mwingine katika Juz. 13 (13: 16), kwa anuani <strong>ya</strong> ‘Akili za<br />
watu haziwatoshelezi.’ Vilevile nimeleta mfumo wa tatu katika A<strong>ya</strong> <strong>ya</strong> 31<br />
<strong>ya</strong> Sura hii tuliyo <strong>na</strong>yo. Na nitaleta mfumo mwingine wa nne <strong>na</strong> tano kulinga<strong>na</strong><br />
maudhui <strong>ya</strong>takavyokuwa.<br />
Hivi sasa <strong>na</strong>rudia kwa ubainifu ufuatao:<br />
Hakika lengo kuu la Uislamu ni kumuunganisha Muumba <strong>na</strong> kiumbe<br />
chake, kwa kupata muongozo katika <strong>ya</strong>le a<strong>na</strong>yo<strong>ya</strong>itakidi <strong>na</strong> ku<strong>ya</strong>fikiri,<br />
ku<strong>ya</strong>sema <strong>na</strong> ku<strong>ya</strong>fan<strong>ya</strong> <strong>na</strong> kuelekea kwake katika yote hayo.<br />
Ndio maa<strong>na</strong> Uislamu ukapinga ushiriki<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> kuuzingatia kuwa ni miongoni<br />
mwa madhambi makubwa <strong>na</strong> kosa lisilosameheka. Kama ambavyo umeichukulia<br />
ria <strong>na</strong> kufan<strong>ya</strong> amali kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong> asiyekuwa Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
ni shirk; <strong>na</strong> ukawapa washiriki<strong>na</strong> adhabu kubwa <strong>na</strong> kali zaidi.<br />
Hapa<strong>na</strong> mwenye shaka kwamba watu wote wakiamini Mungu mmoja <strong>na</strong><br />
wakawa <strong>na</strong> harakati kwa utashi mmoja, basi lazima wote watakuwa<br />
kwenye dini <strong>na</strong> sharia moja; isiyo <strong>na</strong> mifundo <strong>ya</strong> kidini wala kelele za<br />
142
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
utaifa au kuifanyia biashara dini <strong>na</strong> madhehebu. Lakini kuweko <strong>na</strong> miungu<br />
wengi <strong>na</strong> kila mtu <strong>na</strong> lake, basi matokeo <strong>ya</strong>ke ni mfarakano <strong>na</strong> mvurugano<br />
bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> watu.<br />
Kwa hiyo Uislamu u<strong>na</strong>lingania kwenye itikadi <strong>ya</strong> Tawhid itakayomungoza<br />
kwenye misingi ambayo <strong>ya</strong>tajengeka mapenzi, udugu, amani <strong>na</strong> raha.<br />
Kuongezea kwamba huyo Mungu mmoja, ambaye uislamu u<strong>na</strong>toa mwito<br />
aabudiwe <strong>na</strong> kufutwa sharia zake, ndiye Mungu wa ulimwengu Mwenye<br />
hekima, Mwadilifu <strong>na</strong> Mwingi wa rehema a<strong>na</strong>yewapenda watu wote kwa<br />
usawa. A<strong>na</strong>chukia ai<strong>na</strong> zote za sharia, atawalipa wema waliotenda mema<br />
<strong>na</strong> atawalipa uba<strong>ya</strong> kwa <strong>ya</strong>le waliyo<strong>ya</strong>fan<strong>ya</strong>.<br />
Hawakumkadiria Mwenyezi Mungu haki <strong>ya</strong> kadiri <strong>ya</strong>ke kwa vile walimwabudu<br />
mwingine wakaasi amri <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni Mwenye nguvu, Mwenye kushinda.<br />
Atawaadhibu <strong>na</strong> hawatapata mlinzi wala msaidizi zaidi <strong>ya</strong>ke.<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu huteua wajumbe miongoni mwa Malaika, kama vile<br />
Jibril, kutemsha wahyi kwa ma<strong>na</strong>bii. Na miongoni mwa watu vilevile<br />
huteua wajumbe wa<strong>na</strong>otoa mwito wa <strong>ya</strong>le <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>yomridhisha.<br />
Hakika Mwenyezi Mungu ni Mwenye kusikia, Mwenye kuo<strong>na</strong>.<br />
A<strong>na</strong>sikia kauli zao <strong>na</strong> a<strong>na</strong>jua <strong>ya</strong>liyo katika dhamiri zao <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>le<br />
wa<strong>ya</strong>fan<strong>ya</strong>o.<br />
A<strong>na</strong>jua <strong>ya</strong>liyo mbele <strong>ya</strong>o <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>liyo nyuma <strong>ya</strong>o.<br />
Ni ki<strong>na</strong><strong>ya</strong> cha kuwa hakifichiki chochote mbele <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu<br />
Mtukufu. Na ni ufafanuzi wa kauli <strong>ya</strong>ke Mwenyezi Mungu: ‘Hakika<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ni Mwenye kusikia Mwenye kuo<strong>na</strong>.’<br />
Na kwa Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>ya</strong>tarejeshwa mambo yote.<br />
Kwake ndio mwanzo <strong>na</strong> ndio mwisho. Kwa maneno mengine: “Sisi sote ni<br />
143
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
wa Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> kwake tutarejea.”<br />
77. Enyi ambao mmeamini!<br />
Rukuuni <strong>na</strong> sujuduni, <strong>na</strong><br />
muabuduni Mola wenu, <strong>na</strong><br />
fanyeni<br />
mkafaulu.<br />
kheri huenda<br />
78. Na fanyeni jihadi kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu jihadi<br />
i<strong>na</strong>yomstahiki. Yeye ndiye<br />
ambaye amewachagua. Wala<br />
hakuweka juu yenu uzito<br />
katika dini. Ni mila <strong>ya</strong> baba<br />
yenu Ibrahim. Yeye aliwaita<br />
waislamu tangu zamani <strong>na</strong><br />
katika hii. Ili Mtume awe<br />
shahidi juu yenu <strong>na</strong> nyinyi<br />
muwe mashahidi juu <strong>ya</strong> watu.<br />
Basi simamisheni Swala <strong>na</strong><br />
toeni Zaka <strong>na</strong> shikamaneni<br />
<strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu. Yeye<br />
ndiye Mlinzi wenu, Mlinzi<br />
bora <strong>na</strong> Msaidizi bora kabisa.<br />
144
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
FANYENI KHERI ILI MFAULU<br />
A<strong>ya</strong> 77 - 78<br />
MAANA<br />
Enyi ambao mmeamini! Rukuuni <strong>na</strong> sujuduni, <strong>na</strong> muabuduni Mola<br />
wenu, <strong>na</strong> fanyeni kheri huenda mkafaulu. Na fanyeni jihadi kwa ajili<br />
<strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu jihadi i<strong>na</strong>yomstahiki.<br />
Hapa Mwenyezi Mungu (s.w.t.) a<strong>na</strong>waambia wale walimwamini Yeye <strong>na</strong><br />
Mtume wake, kwamba kuamini tu hakufai kitu; ila kukiweko mambo<br />
mane:<br />
Kwanza, kuchunga Swala kwa ajili <strong>ya</strong>ke tu. pale aliposema: ‘Rukuuni <strong>na</strong><br />
sujuduni.’<br />
Pili, kujiepusha <strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong>le aliyo<strong>ya</strong>haramisha, kama hi<strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>, u<strong>na</strong>fiki, kuleta<br />
fit<strong>na</strong>, kuwazuilia watu wema <strong>na</strong> kupanga njama kuleta uharibifu <strong>na</strong> ufisadi.<br />
Hayo ndio makusdio <strong>ya</strong> kusema kwake: ‘Na muabuduni Mola wenu.’<br />
Tatu, kufan<strong>ya</strong> mambo <strong>ya</strong> kheri, kama kuwakoa wenye kuangamia, kusuluhisha,<br />
<strong>na</strong> kusaidia kwenye masilahi <strong>ya</strong> umma. Ndio makusudio <strong>ya</strong> kusema:<br />
‘<strong>na</strong> fanyeni kheri.’<br />
Nne, kupiga<strong>na</strong> jihadi <strong>na</strong> maadui wa Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> wa ubi<strong>na</strong>damu<br />
kwa hali <strong>na</strong> mali.<br />
Yakipatika<strong>na</strong> mambo ha<strong>ya</strong> kwa mtu basi yeye ni katika waliofaulu <strong>na</strong> watu<br />
wema. Yametangulia maelezo kwamba neno ‘huenda,’ kwa Mwenyezi<br />
Mungu, li<strong>na</strong>maanisha uhakika wa kuwepo, lakini likitumika kwa<br />
asiyekuwa Mwenyezi Mungu, basi li<strong>na</strong>kuwa <strong>na</strong> maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kuweko<br />
uwezekano <strong>na</strong> matarajio. 7<br />
7 Ndio maa<strong>na</strong> mara nyingine tu<strong>na</strong>fasiri ‘ili’, kama wafan<strong>ya</strong>vyo wafasiri<br />
wengi wa kiswahili -Mtarjumu<br />
145
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Yeye ndiye ambaye amewachagua.<br />
Yeye ni Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> maneno <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>elekezwa kwa waislamu.<br />
Wajihi wa kuwa wamechaguliwa ni kule kuhusika kwao <strong>na</strong> Bwa<strong>na</strong> wa<br />
Mtume aliye mwisho wa ma<strong>na</strong>bii <strong>na</strong> sharia <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>ya</strong> kudumu.<br />
Wala hakuweka juu yenu uzito katika dini.<br />
Huu ndio msingi katika misingi <strong>ya</strong> sharia za kiislamu, kudhihiri upa<strong>na</strong>,<br />
kuwa mororo <strong>na</strong> ulaini wake. Ku<strong>na</strong> Hadith isemayo: “Hakika dini <strong>ya</strong><br />
Mwenyezi Mungu ni nyepesi,” hai<strong>na</strong> uzito wala mashaka <strong>na</strong> ndiyo dini <strong>ya</strong><br />
maumbile.<br />
Ni kutoka<strong>na</strong> <strong>na</strong> msingi huu ndio mafakihi wametoa fatwa <strong>na</strong> hukumu katika<br />
milango yote <strong>ya</strong> fiqh. Katika ndimi zao <strong>na</strong> vitabu zimeenea kanuni hizi<br />
zifuatazo:<br />
Dharura huondoa vizuizi.<br />
Dharura hupimwa kwa kiwango chake.<br />
Dharura kali huondolewa <strong>na</strong> dharura hafifu.<br />
Huvumiliwa dharura bi<strong>na</strong>fsi kwa kuondoa dharura <strong>ya</strong> umma.<br />
Miongoni mwa <strong>ya</strong><strong>na</strong>yoonyesha kuwa Uislamu ni mwepesi, ni kule<br />
kutokuwako kipingamizi chochote bai<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> mtu <strong>na</strong> muumba wake; kama<br />
zilivyo dini nyingine.<br />
Ni mila <strong>ya</strong> baba yenu Ibrahim.<br />
Makusudio <strong>ya</strong> mila ni dini. Dini <strong>ya</strong> Ibrahim i<strong>na</strong>ingia katika Uislamu kwa<br />
misingi yote <strong>na</strong> sharia zake nyingi <strong>na</strong> tanzu zake. Ibrahim (a.s.) ndiye baba<br />
wa hakika wa ma<strong>na</strong>bii <strong>na</strong> roho <strong>ya</strong> watu wa dini za mbinguni kwa kuangalia<br />
146
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
kutangulia kwake, <strong>na</strong> kuafikia<strong>na</strong> wote juu <strong>ya</strong> u<strong>na</strong>bii wake <strong>na</strong> ukuu wake.<br />
Yeye aliwaita waislamu tangu zamani <strong>na</strong> katika hii.<br />
Imesemeka<strong>na</strong> kuwa yeye, hapa ni Ibrahim, <strong>na</strong> kwanye neno ‘hii ‘ ku<strong>na</strong><br />
maneno <strong>ya</strong> kukadirwa kuwa ‘<strong>na</strong> katika hii ku<strong>na</strong> utukufu wenu.’<br />
Pia imesemeka<strong>na</strong> kuwa yeye hapa ni Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> ‘katika hii’ ni<br />
Qur’an; kwa maa<strong>na</strong> <strong>ya</strong> kuwa Mwenyezi Mungu aliwaita nyinyi umma wa<br />
Muhammad waislamu katika vitabu vilivyotangulia, <strong>na</strong> vilevile amewaita<br />
waislamu katika hii Qur’an.<br />
Tafsri zote mbili zinfaa, kwa <strong>saba</strong>bu Ibrahim (a.s.) a<strong>na</strong>zungumza<br />
mazungumzo <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu. Tazama Juz. 3 (3:19) kifungu cha<br />
‘Hakika dini mbele <strong>ya</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu ni Uislamu.’<br />
Ili Mtume awe shahidi juu yenu <strong>na</strong> nyinyi muwe mashahidi juu <strong>ya</strong><br />
watu.<br />
Kesho hakimu ni Mwenyezi Mungu, shahidi wa kwanza ni Mtume wa<br />
Mwenyezi Mungu (s.a.w.) <strong>na</strong> shahidi wa pili ni ulama. Mtume atakuwa<br />
shahidi juu <strong>ya</strong> wenye elimu kwamba aliwafikishia kutoka kwa Mungu <strong>na</strong>o<br />
wafikishe kwa umma wa Muhammad (s.a.w.) <strong>na</strong> wengineo. Akizembea<br />
mmoja wa maulama kufikisha ujumbe, basi atakuwa amestahili ghadhabu<br />
za Mwenyezi Mungu <strong>na</strong> makazi <strong>ya</strong>ke ni Jahan<strong>na</strong>m ambayo ni makazi<br />
maba<strong>ya</strong>. Umetangulia mfano wake katika Juz. 2 (2:143).<br />
Basi simamisheni Swala <strong>na</strong> toeni Zaka.<br />
Huu ni msisitizo wa <strong>ya</strong>liyopita katika A<strong>ya</strong> ilyotangulia.<br />
Na shikamaneni <strong>na</strong> Mwenyezi Mungu.<br />
147
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
Shikamaneni <strong>na</strong> twaa <strong>ya</strong>ke <strong>na</strong> mjiweke mbali <strong>na</strong> kumwasi. katika Nahjulbalagha<br />
imesemwa “Kujiepusha <strong>na</strong> maasi ni katika ai<strong>na</strong> za isma.”<br />
Yeye ndiye Mlinzi wenu, ikiwa mtamtii <strong>na</strong> mkawa <strong>na</strong> msimamo.<br />
Mlinzi bora <strong>na</strong> Msaidizi bora kabisa kwa yule atakayemfan<strong>ya</strong> ni mlinzi<br />
wake <strong>na</strong> akamtegemea yeye tu, si mwingine.<br />
148
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 22. Sura Hajj<br />
149
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
150
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
151
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
152
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
153
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
154
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
155
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
156
Tafsir <strong>Al</strong>-Kashif: <strong>Juzuu</strong>, 17 21. Sura Anbi<strong>ya</strong><br />
157